Fix thinko in linker documentation.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item How GNU properties are merged.
764
765 When linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
766 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated,
767 which are reported in the link map as
768
769 @smallexample
770 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
771 @end smallexample
772
773 It indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
774 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
775 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
776
777 @smallexample
778 Updated property 0xc0000002 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
779 @end smallexample
780
781 It indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
782 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
783 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
784 @end itemize
785
786 @cindex link map discarded
787 @kindex --print-map-discarded
788 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
789 @item --print-map-discarded
790 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
791 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
792 in the link map. Enabled by default.
793
794 @kindex -n
795 @cindex read-only text
796 @cindex NMAGIC
797 @kindex --nmagic
798 @item -n
799 @itemx --nmagic
800 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
801 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
802 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
803
804 @kindex -N
805 @kindex --omagic
806 @cindex read/write from cmd line
807 @cindex OMAGIC
808 @item -N
809 @itemx --omagic
810 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
811 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
812 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
813 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
814 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
815 specification published by Microsoft.
816
817 @kindex --no-omagic
818 @cindex OMAGIC
819 @item --no-omagic
820 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
821 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
822 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
823 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
824
825 @kindex -o @var{output}
826 @kindex --output=@var{output}
827 @cindex naming the output file
828 @item -o @var{output}
829 @itemx --output=@var{output}
830 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
831 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
832 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
833
834 @kindex -O @var{level}
835 @cindex generating optimized output
836 @item -O @var{level}
837 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
838 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
839 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
840 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
841 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
842 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
843 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
844
845 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
846 @item -plugin @var{name}
847 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
848 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
849 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
850 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
851 wish.
852
853 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
854 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
855 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
856 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
857 copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
858 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
859 just copy in the newest one.
860
861 @kindex --push-state
862 @cindex push state governing input file handling
863 @item --push-state
864 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
865 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
866 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
867
868 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
869 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
870 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
871 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
872 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
873 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
874
875 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
876 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
877 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
878 something as follows:
879
880 @smallexample
881 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
882 @end smallexample
883
884 @kindex --pop-state
885 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
886 @item --pop-state
887 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
888 flags governing input file handling.
889
890 @kindex -q
891 @kindex --emit-relocs
892 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
893 @item -q
894 @itemx --emit-relocs
895 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
896 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
897 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
898 in larger executables.
899
900 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
901
902 @kindex --force-dynamic
903 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
904 @item --force-dynamic
905 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
906 to VxWorks targets.
907
908 @cindex partial link
909 @cindex relocatable output
910 @kindex -r
911 @kindex --relocatable
912 @item -r
913 @itemx --relocatable
914 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
915 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
916 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
917 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
918 @code{OMAGIC}.
919 @c ; see @option{-N}.
920 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
921 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
922 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
923
924 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
925 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
926 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
927 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
928 with input files in other formats at all.
929
930 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
931
932 @kindex -R @var{file}
933 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
934 @cindex symbol-only input
935 @item -R @var{filename}
936 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
937 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
938 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
939 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
940 programs. You may use this option more than once.
941
942 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
943 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
944 the @option{-rpath} option.
945
946 @kindex -s
947 @kindex --strip-all
948 @cindex strip all symbols
949 @item -s
950 @itemx --strip-all
951 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
952
953 @kindex -S
954 @kindex --strip-debug
955 @cindex strip debugger symbols
956 @item -S
957 @itemx --strip-debug
958 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
959
960 @kindex --strip-discarded
961 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
962 @item --strip-discarded
963 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
964 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
965 Enabled by default.
966
967 @kindex -t
968 @kindex --trace
969 @cindex input files, displaying
970 @item -t
971 @itemx --trace
972 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
973 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
974 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
975 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
976 a linker bug report.
977
978 @kindex -T @var{script}
979 @kindex --script=@var{script}
980 @cindex script files
981 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
982 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
983 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
984 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
985 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
986 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
987 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
988 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
989 options accumulate.
990
991 @kindex -dT @var{script}
992 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
993 @cindex script files
994 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
995 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
996 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
997
998 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
999 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1000 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1001 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1002 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1003 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1004 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1005 @samp{gcc}).
1006
1007 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1008 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1009 @cindex undefined symbol
1010 @item -u @var{symbol}
1011 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1012 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1013 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1014 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1015 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1016 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1017
1018 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1019 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1020 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1021 instead.
1022
1023 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1024 @cindex symbols, require defined
1025 @cindex defined symbol
1026 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1027 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1028 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1029 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1030 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1031 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1032 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1033
1034 @kindex -Ur
1035 @cindex constructors
1036 @item -Ur
1037 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1038 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1039 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1040 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1041 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1042 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1043 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1044 @samp{-r} for the others.
1045
1046 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1047 @cindex orphan sections
1048 @cindex sections, orphan
1049 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1050 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1051 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1052
1053 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1054
1055 @table @code
1056 @item place
1057 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1058 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1059 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1060
1061 @item discard
1062 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1063 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1064
1065 @item warn
1066 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1067 issue a warning.
1068
1069 @item error
1070 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1071 @end table
1072
1073 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1074
1075 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1076 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1078 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1079 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1080 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1081 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1082 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1083 in a linker script.
1084
1085 @kindex -v
1086 @kindex -V
1087 @kindex --version
1088 @cindex version
1089 @item -v
1090 @itemx --version
1091 @itemx -V
1092 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1093 lists the supported emulations.
1094
1095 @kindex -x
1096 @kindex --discard-all
1097 @cindex deleting local symbols
1098 @item -x
1099 @itemx --discard-all
1100 Delete all local symbols.
1101
1102 @kindex -X
1103 @kindex --discard-locals
1104 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1105 @item -X
1106 @itemx --discard-locals
1107 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1108 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1109 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1110
1111 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1112 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1113 @cindex symbol tracing
1114 @item -y @var{symbol}
1115 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1116 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1117 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1118 to prepend an underscore.
1119
1120 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1121 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1122
1123 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1124 @item -Y @var{path}
1125 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1126 for Solaris compatibility.
1127
1128 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1129 @item -z @var{keyword}
1130 The recognized keywords are:
1131 @table @samp
1132
1133 @item bndplt
1134 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1135
1136 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1137 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1138 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1139 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1140 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1141 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1142 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1143 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1144 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1145 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1146 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1147
1148 @item cet-report=none
1149 @itemx cet-report=warning
1150 @itemx cet-report=error
1151 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1152 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1153 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1154 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1155 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1156 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1157 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1158 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1159 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1160 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1161 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
1163 @item combreloc
1164 @itemx nocombreloc
1165 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1166 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1167
1168 @item common
1169 @itemx nocommon
1170 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1171 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1172
1173 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1174 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1175 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1176 using pages of this size.
1177
1178 @item defs
1179 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1180 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1181 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1182
1183 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1184 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1185 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1186 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1187 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1188 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1189 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1190 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1191 these options.
1192
1193 @item execstack
1194 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1195
1196 @item global
1197 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1198 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1199 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1200
1201 @item globalaudit
1202 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1203 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1204 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1205 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1206 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1207 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1208
1209 @item ibtplt
1210 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1211 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1212
1213 @item ibt
1214 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1215 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1216 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1217
1218 @item initfirst
1219 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1220 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1221 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1222 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1223 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1224 objects.
1225
1226 @item interpose
1227 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1228 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1229 libraries not so marked.
1230
1231 @item lazy
1232 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1233 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1234 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1235 Lazy binding is the default.
1236
1237 @item loadfltr
1238 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1239
1240 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1241 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1242
1243 @item muldefs
1244 Allow multiple definitions.
1245
1246 @item nocopyreloc
1247 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1248 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1249
1250 @item nodefaultlib
1251 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1252 should ignore any default library search paths.
1253
1254 @item nodelete
1255 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1256
1257 @item nodlopen
1258 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1259
1260 @item nodump
1261 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1262
1263 @item noexecstack
1264 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1265
1266 @item noextern-protected-data
1267 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1268 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1269 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1270 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1271 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1272 i386 and x86-64.
1273
1274 @item noreloc-overflow
1275 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1276 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1277 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1278
1279 @item now
1280 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1281 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1282 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1283 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1284 called.
1285
1286 @item origin
1287 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1288
1289 @item relro
1290 @itemx norelro
1291 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1292 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1293 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1294 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1295 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1296
1297 @item separate-code
1298 @itemx noseparate-code
1299 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1300 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1301 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1302 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1303
1304 @item shstk
1305 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1306 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1307 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1308
1309 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1310 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1311 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1312 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1313
1314 @item text
1315 @itemx notext
1316 @itemx textoff
1317 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1318 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1319 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1320
1321 @item undefs
1322 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1323 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1324 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1325
1326 @end table
1327
1328 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1329
1330 @kindex -(
1331 @cindex groups of archives
1332 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1333 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1334 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1335 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1336
1337 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1338 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1339 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1340 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1341 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1342 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1343 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1344 resolved.
1345
1346 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1347 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1348 more archives.
1349
1350 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1351 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1355 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1356 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1357 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1358 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1359 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1360 restore the old behaviour.
1361
1362 @kindex --as-needed
1363 @kindex --no-as-needed
1364 @item --as-needed
1365 @itemx --no-as-needed
1366 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1367 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1368 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1369 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1370 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1371 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1372 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1373 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1374 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1375 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1376 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1377 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1378 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1379
1380 @kindex --add-needed
1381 @kindex --no-add-needed
1382 @item --add-needed
1383 @itemx --no-add-needed
1384 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1385 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1386 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1387 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1388
1389 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1390 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1391 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1392
1393 @kindex -Bdynamic
1394 @kindex -dy
1395 @kindex -call_shared
1396 @item -Bdynamic
1397 @itemx -dy
1398 @itemx -call_shared
1399 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1400 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1401 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1402 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1403 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1404 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1405
1406 @kindex -Bgroup
1407 @item -Bgroup
1408 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1409 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1410 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1411 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1412 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1413
1414 @kindex -Bstatic
1415 @kindex -dn
1416 @kindex -non_shared
1417 @kindex -static
1418 @item -Bstatic
1419 @itemx -dn
1420 @itemx -non_shared
1421 @itemx -static
1422 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1423 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1424 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1425 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1426 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1427 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1428 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1429 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1430 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1431 libraries.
1432
1433 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1434 @item -Bsymbolic
1435 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1436 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1437 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1438 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1439 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1440 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1441 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1442 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1443
1444 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1445 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1446 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1447 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1448 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1449 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1450 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1451 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1452 libraries and position independent executables.
1453
1454 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1455 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1457 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1458 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1459 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1460 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1461 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1462 which support shared libraries.
1463
1464 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1465 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1466
1467 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1468 @item --dynamic-list-data
1469 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1470
1471 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1472 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1474 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1475
1476 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1477 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1479
1480 @kindex --check-sections
1481 @kindex --no-check-sections
1482 @item --check-sections
1483 @itemx --no-check-sections
1484 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1485 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1486 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1487 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1488 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1489 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1490 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1491 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1492 option.
1493
1494 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1495 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1496 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1497 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1498 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1499 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1500 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1501 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1502 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1503 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1504 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1505 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1506
1507 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1508 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1509 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1510 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1511 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1512 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1513 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1514 symbols.
1515
1516 @cindex cross reference table
1517 @kindex --cref
1518 @item --cref
1519 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1520 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1521 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1522
1523 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1524 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1525 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1526 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1527 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1528 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1529 symbol are listed.
1530
1531 @cindex common allocation
1532 @kindex --no-define-common
1533 @item --no-define-common
1534 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1535 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1536 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1537
1538 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1539 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1540 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1541 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1542 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1543 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1544 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1545 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1546 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1547 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1548
1549 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1550 @cindex section groups
1551 @cindex COMDAT
1552 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1553 @item --force-group-allocation
1554 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1555 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1556 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1557 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1558 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1559 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1560
1561 @cindex symbols, from command line
1562 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1563 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1564 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1565 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1566 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1567 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1568 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1569 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1570 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1571 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1572 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1573 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1574
1575 @cindex demangling, from command line
1576 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1577 @kindex --no-demangle
1578 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1579 @itemx --no-demangle
1580 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1581 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1582 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1583 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1584 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1585 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1586 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1587 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1588 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1589
1590 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1591 @kindex -I@var{file}
1592 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1593 @item -I@var{file}
1594 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1595 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1596 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1597 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1598 doing.
1599
1600 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1601 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1602 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1603 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1604 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1605 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1606
1607 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1608 @item --embedded-relocs
1609 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1610 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1611 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1612 targets.
1613
1614 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1615 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1617 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1618
1619 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1620 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1621 @item --fatal-warnings
1622 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1623 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1624 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1625
1626 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1627 @item --force-exe-suffix
1628 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1629
1630 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1631 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1632 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1633 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1634 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1635 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1636
1637 @kindex --gc-sections
1638 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1639 @cindex garbage collection
1640 @item --gc-sections
1641 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1642 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1643 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1644 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1645 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1646 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1647 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1648
1649 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1650 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1651 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1652 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1653 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1654 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1655 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1656 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1657 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1658 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1659
1660 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1661 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1662 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1663 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1664 command in the linker script.
1665
1666 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1667 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1668 @cindex garbage collection
1669 @item --print-gc-sections
1670 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1671 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1672 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1673 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1674 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1675 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1676 line.
1677
1678 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1679 @cindex garbage collection
1680 @item --gc-keep-exported
1681 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1682 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1683 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1684 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1685 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1686 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1687 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1688 ELF format targets.
1689
1690 @kindex --print-output-format
1691 @cindex output format
1692 @item --print-output-format
1693 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1694 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1695 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1696
1697 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1698 @cindex memory usage
1699 @item --print-memory-usage
1700 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1701 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1702 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1703 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1704 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1705
1706 @smallexample
1707 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1708 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1709 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1710 @end smallexample
1711
1712 @cindex help
1713 @cindex usage
1714 @kindex --help
1715 @item --help
1716 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1717
1718 @kindex --target-help
1719 @item --target-help
1720 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1721
1722 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1723 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1725 @option{-M} option, above.
1726
1727 @cindex memory usage
1728 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1729 @item --no-keep-memory
1730 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1731 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1732 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1733 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1734 while linking a large executable.
1735
1736 @kindex --no-undefined
1737 @kindex -z defs
1738 @kindex -z undefs
1739 @item --no-undefined
1740 @itemx -z defs
1741 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1742 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1743 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1744 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1745 libraries being linked in.
1746
1747 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1748
1749 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1750 @kindex -z muldefs
1751 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1752 @itemx -z muldefs
1753 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1754 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1755 first definition will be used.
1756
1757 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1758 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1759 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1760 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1761 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1762 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1763 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1764 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1765 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1766
1767 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1768 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1769 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1770 a shared library.
1771
1772 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1773 libraries specified at link time are that:
1774
1775 @itemize @bullet
1776 @item
1777 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1778 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1779 resolvable at load time.
1780 @item
1781 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1782 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1783
1784 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1785 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1786 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1787 appropriate memset function.
1788 @end itemize
1789
1790 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1791 @item --no-undefined-version
1792 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1793 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1794 will be issued instead.
1795
1796 @kindex --default-symver
1797 @item --default-symver
1798 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799 exported symbols.
1800
1801 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1802 @item --default-imported-symver
1803 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1804 imported symbols.
1805
1806 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1807 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1808 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1809 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1810 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1811 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1812 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1813 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1814 inappropriate.
1815
1816 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1817 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1819 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1820
1821 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1822 @item --no-whole-archive
1823 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1824 archive files.
1825
1826 @cindex output file after errors
1827 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1828 @item --noinhibit-exec
1829 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1830 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1831 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1832 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1833
1834 @kindex -nostdlib
1835 @item -nostdlib
1836 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1837 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1838 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1839
1840 @ifclear SingleFormat
1841 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1842 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1844 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1845 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1846 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1847 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1848 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1849 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1850 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1851 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1852 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1853 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1854 @end ifclear
1855
1856 @kindex --out-implib
1857 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1858 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1859 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1860 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1861 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1862 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1863 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1864 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1865
1866 @kindex -pie
1867 @kindex --pic-executable
1868 @item -pie
1869 @itemx --pic-executable
1870 @cindex position independent executables
1871 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1872 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1873 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1874 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1875 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1876 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1877
1878 @kindex -qmagic
1879 @item -qmagic
1880 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1881
1882 @kindex -Qy
1883 @item -Qy
1884 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1885
1886 @kindex --relax
1887 @cindex synthesizing linker
1888 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1889 @cindex --no-relax
1890 @item --relax
1891 @itemx --no-relax
1892 An option with machine dependent effects.
1893 @ifset GENERIC
1894 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1895 @end ifset
1896 @ifset H8300
1897 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1898 @end ifset
1899 @ifset XTENSA
1900 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1901 @end ifset
1902 @ifset M68HC11
1903 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1904 @end ifset
1905 @ifset NIOSII
1906 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1907 @end ifset
1908 @ifset POWERPC
1909 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1910 @end ifset
1911
1912 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1913 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1914 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1915 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1916 instructions, and combining constant values.
1917
1918 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1919 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1922 family of processors.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 @ifset GENERIC
1926 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1927 but ignored.
1928 @end ifset
1929
1930 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1931 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1932
1933 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1934 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1935 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1936 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1937 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1939 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1940 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1941 @ifset GENERIC
1942 (such as VxWorks)
1943 @end ifset
1944 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1945 run-time memory.
1946
1947 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1948 or symbols needed for relocations.
1949
1950 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1951 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1952
1953 @ifset GENERIC
1954 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1955 @cindex runtime library search path
1956 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1957 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1958 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1959 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1960 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1961 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1962 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1963 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1964 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1965 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1966
1967 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1968 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1969 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1973 file systems.
1974
1975 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1976 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1977 the @option{-rpath} option.
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @ifset GENERIC
1981 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1982 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986 of the input files.
1987
1988 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1991 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1992 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1993 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1994 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995 appearing multiple times.
1996
1997 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2001 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005 supported.
2006
2007 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010 runtime linker would do.
2011
2012 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2013 libraries:
2014 @enumerate
2015 @item
2016 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2017 @item
2018 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2022 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2025 @item
2026 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2029 @item
2030 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2032 @item
2033 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2034 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040 @item
2041 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042 @item
2043 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045 @end enumerate
2046
2047 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048 warning and continue with the link.
2049 @end ifset
2050
2051 @kindex -shared
2052 @kindex -Bshareable
2053 @item -shared
2054 @itemx -Bshareable
2055 @cindex shared libraries
2056 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2058 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2059 undefined symbols in the link.
2060
2061 @kindex --sort-common
2062 @item --sort-common
2063 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2065 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2071
2072 @kindex --sort-section=name
2073 @item --sort-section=name
2074 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075 patterns in the linker script.
2076
2077 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078 @item --sort-section=alignment
2079 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080 patterns in the linker script.
2081
2082 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
2088 @kindex --split-by-file
2089 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2090 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2091 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092 size of 1 if not given.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2095 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2096 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2097 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2098 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2099 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2105 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2106
2107 @kindex --stats
2108 @item --stats
2109 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110 as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2112 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2113 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
2118 @kindex --task-link
2119 @item --task-link
2120 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
2123 @kindex --traditional-format
2124 @cindex traditional format
2125 @item --traditional-format
2126 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2128 use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130 @cindex dbx
2131 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2132 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2135 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2136 combine duplicate entries.
2137
2138 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143 line.
2144 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2150 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2153 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2154 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2158 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2159
2160 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2163 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164 byte of the text segment.
2165
2166 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
2173 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
2179 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182 values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item ignore-all
2186 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2187
2188 @item report-all
2189 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2190
2191 @item ignore-in-object-files
2192 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200 command line.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208 can change this to a warning.
2209
2210 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @item --dll-verbose
2213 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2214 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2215 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2216 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2218
2219 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2221 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2222 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2224 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2225 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229 @xref{WIN32}.
2230
2231 @kindex --warn-common
2232 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234 @item --warn-common
2235 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2236 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2237 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2239 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2240 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244 @table @samp
2245 @item int i = 1;
2246 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247 file.
2248
2249 @item extern int i;
2250 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252 variable somewhere.
2253
2254 @item int i;
2255 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260 a definition of the same variable.
2261 @end table
2262
2263 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267 a common symbol.
2268
2269 @enumerate
2270 @item
2271 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272 definition for the symbol.
2273 @smallexample
2274 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277 @end smallexample
2278
2279 @item
2280 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283 @smallexample
2284 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @item
2290 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291 @smallexample
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @item
2298 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299 @smallexample
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @item
2306 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308 encountered in a different order.
2309 @smallexample
2310 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313 @end smallexample
2314 @end enumerate
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-constructors
2317 @item --warn-constructors
2318 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320 detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2324 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336 @kindex --warn-once
2337 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339 @item --warn-once
2340 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341 which refers to it.
2342
2343 @kindex --warn-section-align
2344 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346 @item --warn-section-align
2347 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
2353 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2355 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2356
2357 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358 @item --warn-alternate-em
2359 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
2361 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
2372 @kindex --whole-archive
2373 @cindex including an entire archive
2374 @item --whole-archive
2375 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2376 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2377 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380 library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
2382 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2383 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2385 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2388 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393 @var{symbol}.
2394
2395 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400 Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402 @smallexample
2403 void *
2404 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2405 @{
2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408 @}
2409 @end smallexample
2410
2411 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2412 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2417 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2418 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
2422 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 int
2429 f (void)
2430 @{
2431 return 123;
2432 @}
2433
2434 int
2435 g (void)
2436 @{
2437 return f();
2438 @}
2439 @end smallexample
2440
2441 Please keep in mind that with link-time optimization (LTO) enabled, your whole
2442 program may be a translation unit.
2443
2444 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2445 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2446 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2447 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2448 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2449 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2450 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2451
2452 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2453 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2454 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2455 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2456 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2457
2458 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2459 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2460 @item --enable-new-dtags
2461 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2462 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2463 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2464 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2465 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2466 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2467 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2468 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2469
2470 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2471 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2472 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2473 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2474 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2475 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2476 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2477
2478 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2479 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2480 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2481 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2482 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2483 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2484 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2485 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2486
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2488 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2489 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2490 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2491 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2492 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2493 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2494 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2495 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2496 compressed using zlib.
2497
2498 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2499 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2500 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2501 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2502 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2503 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2504
2505 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2506 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2507
2508 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2509 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2510 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2511 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2512
2513 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2514 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2515 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2516 @option{--help} option.
2517
2518 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2519 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2520 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2521 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2522 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2523 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2524
2525 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2526 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2527 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2528 has been used.
2529
2530 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2531 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2532
2533 @kindex --build-id
2534 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2535 @item --build-id
2536 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2537 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2538 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2539 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2540 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2541 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2542 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2543 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2544 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2545 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2546 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2547
2548 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2549 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2550 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2551 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2552 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2553 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2554
2555 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2556 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2557 @end table
2558
2559 @c man end
2560
2561 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2562
2563 @c man begin OPTIONS
2564
2565 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2566 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2567 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2568 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2569 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2570 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2571 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2572 object file).
2573
2574 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2575 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2576 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2577 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2578
2579 @table @gcctabopt
2580
2581 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2582 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2583 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2584 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2585 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2586
2587 @kindex --base-file
2588 @item --base-file @var{file}
2589 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2590 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2591 @file{dlltool}.
2592 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2593
2594 @kindex --dll
2595 @item --dll
2596 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2597 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2598 file.
2599 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2600
2601 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2602 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2603 @item --enable-long-section-names
2604 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2605 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2606 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2607 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2608 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2609 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2610 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2611 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2612 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2613 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2614 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2615 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2616 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2617 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2618 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2619 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2620 image and not stripping symbols.
2621 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2622
2623 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2624 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2625 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2626 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2627 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2628 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2629 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2630 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2631 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2632 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2633 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2634 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2635 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2636 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2637 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2638 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2639 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2640 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2641
2642 @kindex --leading-underscore
2643 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2644 @item --leading-underscore
2645 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2646 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2647 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2648 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2649
2650 @cindex DLLs, creating
2651 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2652 @item --export-all-symbols
2653 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2654 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2655 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2656 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2657 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2658 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2659 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2660 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2661 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2662 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2663 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2664 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2665 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2666 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2667 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2668 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2669 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2670 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2671 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2672 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2673 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2674 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2675 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2676
2677 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2678 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2679 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2680 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2681 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2682
2683 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2684 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2685 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2686 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2687
2688 @kindex --file-alignment
2689 @item --file-alignment
2690 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2691 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2692 512.
2693 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2694
2695 @cindex heap size
2696 @kindex --heap
2697 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2698 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2699 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2700 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2701 committed.
2702 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2703
2704 @cindex image base
2705 @kindex --image-base
2706 @item --image-base @var{value}
2707 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2708 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2709 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2710 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2711 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2712 for dlls.
2713 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2714
2715 @kindex --kill-at
2716 @item --kill-at
2717 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2718 symbols before they are exported.
2719 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2720
2721 @kindex --large-address-aware
2722 @item --large-address-aware
2723 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2724 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2725 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2726 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2727 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2728 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2729
2730 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2731 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2732 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2733 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2734 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2735 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2736 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2737
2738 @kindex --major-image-version
2739 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2740 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2741 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2742
2743 @kindex --major-os-version
2744 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2745 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2746 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2747
2748 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2749 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2750 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2751 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2752
2753 @kindex --minor-image-version
2754 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2755 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2756 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2757
2758 @kindex --minor-os-version
2759 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2760 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2761 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2762
2763 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2764 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2765 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2766 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2767
2768 @cindex DEF files, creating
2769 @cindex DLLs, creating
2770 @kindex --output-def
2771 @item --output-def @var{file}
2772 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2773 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2774 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2775 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2776 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2777 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2778
2779 @cindex DLLs, creating
2780 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2781 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2782 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2783 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2784 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2785 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2786 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2787 execution are avoided.
2788 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2789
2790 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2791 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2792 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2793 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2794 default.
2795 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2796
2797 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2798 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2799 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2800 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2801 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2802 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2803 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2804 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2805 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2806 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2807
2808 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2809 @item --enable-auto-import
2810 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2811 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2812 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2813 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2814
2815 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2816 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2817
2818 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2819 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2820 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2821
2822 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2823 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2824 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2825 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2826 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2827
2828 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2829 see this message:
2830
2831 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2832 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2833
2834 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2835 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2836 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2837 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2838 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2839 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2840 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2841 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2842 the warning, and exit.
2843
2844 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2845 data type of the exported variable:
2846
2847 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2848 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2849 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2850
2851 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2852 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2853 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2854 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2855
2856 @example
2857 extern type extern_array[];
2858 extern_array[1] -->
2859 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2860 @end example
2861
2862 or
2863
2864 @example
2865 extern type extern_array[];
2866 extern_array[1] -->
2867 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2868 @end example
2869
2870 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2871 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2872
2873 @example
2874 extern struct s extern_struct;
2875 extern_struct.field -->
2876 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2877 @end example
2878
2879 or
2880
2881 @example
2882 extern long long extern_ll;
2883 extern_ll -->
2884 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2885 @end example
2886
2887 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2888 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2889 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2890 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2891 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2892 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2893 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2894 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2895
2896 Original:
2897 @example
2898 --foo.h
2899 extern int arr[];
2900 --foo.c
2901 #include "foo.h"
2902 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2903 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2904 @}
2905 @end example
2906
2907 Solution 1:
2908 @example
2909 --foo.h
2910 extern int arr[];
2911 --foo.c
2912 #include "foo.h"
2913 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2914 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2915 volatile int *parr = arr;
2916 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2917 @}
2918 @end example
2919
2920 Solution 2:
2921 @example
2922 --foo.h
2923 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2924 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2925 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2926 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2927 #else
2928 #define FOO_IMPORT
2929 #endif
2930 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2931 --foo.c
2932 #include "foo.h"
2933 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2934 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2935 @}
2936 @end example
2937
2938 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2939 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2940 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2941 functions).
2942
2943 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2944 @item --disable-auto-import
2945 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2946 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2947 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2948
2949 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2950 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2951 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2952 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2953 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2954 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2955 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2956
2957 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2958 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2959 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2960 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2961
2962 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2963 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2964 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2965 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2966
2967 @kindex --section-alignment
2968 @item --section-alignment
2969 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2970 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2971 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2972
2973 @cindex stack size
2974 @kindex --stack
2975 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2976 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2977 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2978 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2979 committed.
2980 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2981
2982 @kindex --subsystem
2983 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2984 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2985 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2986 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2987 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2988 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2989 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2990 @var{which}.
2991 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2992
2993 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2994 of the PE file header:
2995 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2996
2997 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2998 @item --high-entropy-va
2999 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
3000 (ASLR).
3001
3002 @kindex --dynamicbase
3003 @item --dynamicbase
3004 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3005 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3006 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3007
3008 @kindex --forceinteg
3009 @item --forceinteg
3010 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3011
3012 @kindex --nxcompat
3013 @item --nxcompat
3014 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3015 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3016
3017 @kindex --no-isolation
3018 @item --no-isolation
3019 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3020
3021 @kindex --no-seh
3022 @item --no-seh
3023 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3024 this image.
3025
3026 @kindex --no-bind
3027 @item --no-bind
3028 Do not bind this image.
3029
3030 @kindex --wdmdriver
3031 @item --wdmdriver
3032 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3033
3034 @kindex --tsaware
3035 @item --tsaware
3036 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3037
3038 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3039 @item --insert-timestamp
3040 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3041 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3042 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3043 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3044 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3045 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3046 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3047 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3048 identically.
3049 @end table
3050
3051 @c man end
3052
3053 @ifset C6X
3054 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3055
3056 @c man begin OPTIONS
3057
3058 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3059 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3060 all executables use an index of 0.
3061
3062 @table @gcctabopt
3063
3064 @kindex --dsbt-size
3065 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3066 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3067 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3068 entries.
3069
3070 @kindex --dsbt-index
3071 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3072 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3073 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3074 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3075 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3076
3077 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3078 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3079 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3080
3081 @end table
3082
3083 @c man end
3084 @end ifset
3085
3086 @ifset CSKY
3087 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3088
3089 @c man begin OPTIONS
3090
3091 @table @gcctabopt
3092
3093 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3094 @item --branch-stub
3095 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3096 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3097 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3098 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3099 the compiler or assembler.
3100
3101 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3102 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3103 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3104 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3105 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3106 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3107 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3108 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3109 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3110
3111 @end table
3112
3113 @c man end
3114 @end ifset
3115
3116 @ifset M68HC11
3117 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3118
3119 @c man begin OPTIONS
3120
3121 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3122 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3123
3124 @table @gcctabopt
3125
3126 @kindex --no-trampoline
3127 @item --no-trampoline
3128 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3129 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3130 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3131
3132 @kindex --bank-window
3133 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3134 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3135 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3136 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3137 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3138
3139 @end table
3140
3141 @c man end
3142 @end ifset
3143
3144 @ifset M68K
3145 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3146
3147 @c man begin OPTIONS
3148
3149 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3150 when linking for 68K targets.
3151
3152 @table @gcctabopt
3153
3154 @kindex --got
3155 @item --got=@var{type}
3156 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3157 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3158 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3159 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3160
3161 @end table
3162
3163 @c man end
3164 @end ifset
3165
3166 @ifset MIPS
3167 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3168
3169 @c man begin OPTIONS
3170
3171 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3172 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3173 linking for MIPS targets.
3174
3175 @table @gcctabopt
3176
3177 @kindex --insn32
3178 @item --insn32
3179 @kindex --no-insn32
3180 @itemx --no-insn32
3181 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3182 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3183 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3184 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3185 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3186 possible.
3187
3188 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3189 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3190 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3191 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3192 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3193 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3194 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3195 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3196 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3197 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3198 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3199 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3200 an error.
3201
3202 @end table
3203
3204 @c man end
3205 @end ifset
3206
3207 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3208 @node Environment
3209 @section Environment Variables
3210
3211 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3212
3213 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3214 @ifclear SingleFormat
3215 @code{GNUTARGET},
3216 @end ifclear
3217 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3218
3219 @ifclear SingleFormat
3220 @kindex GNUTARGET
3221 @cindex default input format
3222 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3223 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3224 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3225 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3226 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3227 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3228 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3229 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3230 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3231 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3232 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3233 @end ifclear
3234
3235 @kindex LDEMULATION
3236 @cindex default emulation
3237 @cindex emulation, default
3238 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3239 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3240 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3241 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3242 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3243 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3244 linker was configured.
3245
3246 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3247 @cindex demangling, default
3248 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3249 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3250 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3251 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3252 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3253 options.
3254
3255 @c man end
3256 @end ifset
3257
3258 @node Scripts
3259 @chapter Linker Scripts
3260
3261 @cindex scripts
3262 @cindex linker scripts
3263 @cindex command files
3264 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3265 written in the linker command language.
3266
3267 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3268 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3269 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3270 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3271 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3272 described below.
3273
3274 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3275 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3276 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3277 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3278 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3279
3280 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3281 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3282 default linker script.
3283
3284 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3285 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3286 Linker Scripts}.
3287
3288 @menu
3289 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3290 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3291 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3292 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3293 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3294 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3295 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3296 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3297 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3298 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3299 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3300 @end menu
3301
3302 @node Basic Script Concepts
3303 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3304 @cindex linker script concepts
3305 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3306 describe the linker script language.
3307
3308 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3309 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3310 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3311 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3312 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3313 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3314 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3315 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3316
3317 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3318 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3319 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3320 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3321 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3322 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3323 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3324 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3325 of debugging information.
3326
3327 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3328 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3329 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3330 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3331 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3332 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3333 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3334 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3335 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3336 RAM address would be the VMA.
3337
3338 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3339 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3340
3341 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3342 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3343 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3344 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3345 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3346 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3347 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3348
3349 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3350 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3351 option.
3352
3353 @node Script Format
3354 @section Linker Script Format
3355 @cindex linker script format
3356 Linker scripts are text files.
3357
3358 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3359 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3360 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3361 generally ignored.
3362
3363 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3364 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3365 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3366 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3367 file name.
3368
3369 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3370 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3371 to whitespace.
3372
3373 @node Simple Example
3374 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3375 @cindex linker script example
3376 @cindex example of linker script
3377 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3378
3379 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3380 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3381 memory layout of the output file.
3382
3383 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3384 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3385 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3386 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3387 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3388 your input files.
3389
3390 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3391 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3392 linker script which will do that:
3393 @smallexample
3394 SECTIONS
3395 @{
3396 . = 0x10000;
3397 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3398 . = 0x8000000;
3399 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3400 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3401 @}
3402 @end smallexample
3403
3404 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3405 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3406 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3407
3408 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3409 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3410 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3411 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3412 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3413 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3414 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3415
3416 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3417 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3418 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3419 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3420 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3421 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3422
3423 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3424 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3425 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3426
3427 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3428 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3429 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3430 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3431 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3432 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3433 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3434
3435 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3436 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3437 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3438 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3439 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3440 sections.
3441
3442 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3443
3444 @node Simple Commands
3445 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3446 @cindex linker script simple commands
3447 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3448
3449 @menu
3450 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3451 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3452 @ifclear SingleFormat
3453 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3454 @end ifclear
3455
3456 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3457 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3458 @end menu
3459
3460 @node Entry Point
3461 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3462 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3463 @cindex start of execution
3464 @cindex first instruction
3465 @cindex entry point
3466 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3467 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3468 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3469 @smallexample
3470 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3471 @end smallexample
3472
3473 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3474 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3475 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3476 @itemize @bullet
3477 @item
3478 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3479 @item
3480 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3481 @item
3482 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3483 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3484 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3485 @item
3486 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3487 @item
3488 The address @code{0}.
3489 @end itemize
3490
3491 @node File Commands
3492 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3493 @cindex linker script file commands
3494 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3495
3496 @table @code
3497 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3498 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3499 @cindex including a linker script
3500 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3501 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3502 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3503 10 levels deep.
3504
3505 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3506 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3507
3508 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3509 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3510 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3511 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3512 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3513 @cindex linker script input object files
3514 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3515 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3516
3517 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3518 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3519 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3520
3521 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3522 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3523
3524 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3525 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3526 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3527 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3528 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3529 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3530 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3531 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3532 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3533 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3534
3535 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3536 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3537 @samp{-l}.
3538
3539 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3540 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3541 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3542
3543 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3544 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3545 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3546 @cindex grouping input files
3547 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3548 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3549 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3550 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3551
3552 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3553 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3554 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3555 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3556 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3557 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3558 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3559 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3560 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3561 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3562 setting afterwards.
3563
3564 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3565 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3566 @cindex output file name in linker script
3567 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3568 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3569 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3570 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3571 precedence.
3572
3573 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3574 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3575
3576 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3577 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3578 @cindex library search path in linker script
3579 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3580 @cindex search path in linker script
3581 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3582 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3583 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3584 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3585 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3586 the command-line option are searched first.
3587
3588 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3589 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3590 @cindex first input file
3591 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3592 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3593 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3594 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3595 first file.
3596 @end table
3597
3598 @ifclear SingleFormat
3599 @node Format Commands
3600 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3601 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3602
3603 @table @code
3604 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3605 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3606 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3607 @cindex output file format in linker script
3608 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3609 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3610 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3611 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3612 line option takes precedence.
3613
3614 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3615 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3616 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3617 desired endianness.
3618
3619 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3620 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3621 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3622 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3623
3624 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3625 command:
3626 @smallexample
3627 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3628 @end smallexample
3629 This says that the default format for the output file is
3630 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3631 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3632 format.
3633
3634 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3635 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3636 @cindex input file format in linker script
3637 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3638 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3639 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3640 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3641 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3642 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3643 @end table
3644 @end ifclear
3645
3646 @node REGION_ALIAS
3647 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3648 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3649 @cindex region alias
3650 @cindex region names
3651
3652 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3653 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3654
3655 @smallexample
3656 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3657 @end smallexample
3658
3659 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3660 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3661 to memory regions. An example follows.
3662
3663 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3664 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3665 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3666 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3667 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3668 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3669 sections:
3670
3671 @itemize @bullet
3672 @item
3673 @code{.text} program code;
3674 @item
3675 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3676 @item
3677 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3678 @item
3679 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3680 @end itemize
3681
3682 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3683 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3684 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3685 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3686 @code{C}:
3687 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3688 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3689 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3690 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3691 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3692 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3693 @end multitable
3694 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3695 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3696 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3697 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3698
3699 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3700 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3701 memory layout:
3702 @smallexample
3703 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3704
3705 SECTIONS
3706 @{
3707 .text :
3708 @{
3709 *(.text)
3710 @} > REGION_TEXT
3711 .rodata :
3712 @{
3713 *(.rodata)
3714 rodata_end = .;
3715 @} > REGION_RODATA
3716 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3717 @{
3718 data_start = .;
3719 *(.data)
3720 @} > REGION_DATA
3721 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3722 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3723 .bss :
3724 @{
3725 *(.bss)
3726 @} > REGION_BSS
3727 @}
3728 @end smallexample
3729
3730 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3731 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3732 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3733 @table @code
3734 @item A
3735 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3736 @smallexample
3737 MEMORY
3738 @{
3739 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3740 @}
3741
3742 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3743 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3744 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3745 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3746 @end smallexample
3747 @item B
3748 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3749 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3750 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3751 @smallexample
3752 MEMORY
3753 @{
3754 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3755 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3756 @}
3757
3758 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3759 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3760 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3761 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3762 @end smallexample
3763 @item C
3764 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3765 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3766 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3767 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3768 @smallexample
3769 MEMORY
3770 @{
3771 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3772 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3773 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3774 @}
3775
3776 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3777 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3778 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3779 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3780 @end smallexample
3781 @end table
3782
3783 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3784 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3785 necessary:
3786 @smallexample
3787 #include <string.h>
3788
3789 extern char data_start [];
3790 extern char data_size [];
3791 extern char data_load_start [];
3792
3793 void copy_data(void)
3794 @{
3795 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3796 @{
3797 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3798 @}
3799 @}
3800 @end smallexample
3801
3802 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3803 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3804 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3805
3806 @table @code
3807 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3808 @kindex ASSERT
3809 @cindex assertion in linker script
3810 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3811 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3812
3813 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3814 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3815 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3816 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3817 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3818
3819 @smallexample
3820 .stack :
3821 @{
3822 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3823 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3824 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3825 @}
3826 @end smallexample
3827
3828 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3829 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3830 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3831
3832 @smallexample
3833 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3834 .stack :
3835 @{
3836 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3837 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3838 @}
3839 @end smallexample
3840
3841 will work.
3842
3843 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3844 @kindex EXTERN
3845 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3846 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3847 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3848 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3849 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3850 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3851
3852 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3853 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3854 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3855 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3856 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3857 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3858
3859 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3860 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3861 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3862 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3863 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3864 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3865
3866 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3867 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3868 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3869 @cindex section groups
3870 @cindex COMDAT
3871 This command has the same effect as the
3872 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3873 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3874 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3875 specified (@samp{-r}).
3876
3877 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3878 @kindex INSERT
3879 @cindex insert user script into default script
3880 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3881 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3882 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3883 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3884 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3885 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3886 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3887 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3888 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3889 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3890 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3891 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3892 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3893
3894 @smallexample
3895 SECTIONS
3896 @{
3897 OVERLAY :
3898 @{
3899 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3900 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3901 @}
3902 @}
3903 INSERT AFTER .text;
3904 @end smallexample
3905
3906 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3907 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3908 @cindex cross references
3909 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3910 references among certain output sections.
3911
3912 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3913 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3914 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3915 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3916 a function defined in the other section.
3917
3918 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3919 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3920 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3921 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3922 names.
3923
3924 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3925 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3926 @cindex cross references
3927 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3928 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3929
3930 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3931 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3932 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3933 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3934 must never call back.
3935
3936 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3937 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3938 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3939 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3940 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3941 names, not input section names.
3942
3943 @ifclear SingleFormat
3944 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3945 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3946 @cindex machine architecture
3947 @cindex architecture
3948 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3949 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3950 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3951 the @samp{-f} option.
3952 @end ifclear
3953
3954 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3955 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3956 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3957 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3958 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3959 @xref{Expression Section}.
3960 @end table
3961
3962 @node Assignments
3963 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3964 @cindex assignment in scripts
3965 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3966 @cindex variables, defining
3967 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3968 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3969
3970 @menu
3971 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3972 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3973 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3974 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3975 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3976 @end menu
3977
3978 @node Simple Assignments
3979 @subsection Simple Assignments
3980
3981 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3982
3983 @table @code
3984 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3985 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3986 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3987 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3988 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3989 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3990 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3991 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3992 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3993 @end table
3994
3995 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3996 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3997 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3998
3999 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4000 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4001
4002 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4003
4004 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4005
4006 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4007 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4008 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4009
4010 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4011 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4012
4013 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4014 assignments may be used:
4015
4016 @smallexample
4017 floating_point = 0;
4018 SECTIONS
4019 @{
4020 .text :
4021 @{
4022 *(.text)
4023 _etext = .;
4024 @}
4025 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4026 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4027 @}
4028 @end smallexample
4029 @noindent
4030 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4031 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4032 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4033 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4034 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4035
4036 @node HIDDEN
4037 @subsection HIDDEN
4038 @cindex HIDDEN
4039 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4040 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4041
4042 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4043 @code{HIDDEN}:
4044
4045 @smallexample
4046 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4047 SECTIONS
4048 @{
4049 .text :
4050 @{
4051 *(.text)
4052 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4053 @}
4054 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4055 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4056 @}
4057 @end smallexample
4058 @noindent
4059 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4060
4061 @node PROVIDE
4062 @subsection PROVIDE
4063 @cindex PROVIDE
4064 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4065 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4066 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4067 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4068 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4069 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4070 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4071 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4072
4073 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4074 @smallexample
4075 SECTIONS
4076 @{
4077 .text :
4078 @{
4079 *(.text)
4080 _etext = .;
4081 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4082 @}
4083 @}
4084 @end smallexample
4085
4086 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4087 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4088 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4089 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4090 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4091 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4092
4093 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4094 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4095 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4096 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4097 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4098
4099 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4100 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4101 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4102 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4103 hidden and won't be exported.
4104
4105 @node Source Code Reference
4106 @subsection Source Code Reference
4107
4108 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4109 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4110 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4111 symbol that does not have a value.
4112
4113 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4114 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4115 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4116 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4117 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4118 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4119 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4120 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4121
4122 @smallexample
4123 extern int foo;
4124 @end smallexample
4125
4126 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4127
4128 @smallexample
4129 _foo = 1000;
4130 @end smallexample
4131
4132 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4133 transformation has taken place.
4134
4135 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4136 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4137 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4138 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4139 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4140 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4141 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4142
4143 @smallexample
4144 int foo = 1000;
4145 @end smallexample
4146
4147 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4148 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4149 number 1000 is initially stored.
4150
4151 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4152 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4153 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4154 So:
4155
4156 @smallexample
4157 foo = 1;
4158 @end smallexample
4159
4160 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4161 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4162 address. Whereas:
4163
4164 @smallexample
4165 int * a = & foo;
4166 @end smallexample
4167
4168 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4169 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4170 the variable @samp{a}.
4171
4172 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4173 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4174 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4175
4176 @smallexample
4177 foo = 1000;
4178 @end smallexample
4179
4180 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4181 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4182 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4183 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4184 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4185
4186 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4187 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4188 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4189 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4190 linker script contains these declarations:
4191
4192 @smallexample
4193 @group
4194 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4195 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4196 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4197 @end group
4198 @end smallexample
4199
4200 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4201
4202 @smallexample
4203 @group
4204 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4205
4206 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4207 @end group
4208 @end smallexample
4209
4210 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4211 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4212 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4213
4214 @smallexample
4215 @group
4216 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4217
4218 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4219 @end group
4220 @end smallexample
4221
4222 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4223 operators.
4224
4225 @node SECTIONS
4226 @section SECTIONS Command
4227 @kindex SECTIONS
4228 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4229 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4230
4231 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4232 @smallexample
4233 SECTIONS
4234 @{
4235 @var{sections-command}
4236 @var{sections-command}
4237 @dots{}
4238 @}
4239 @end smallexample
4240
4241 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4242
4243 @itemize @bullet
4244 @item
4245 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4246 @item
4247 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4248 @item
4249 an output section description
4250 @item
4251 an overlay description
4252 @end itemize
4253
4254 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4255 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4256 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4257 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4258 the layout of the output file.
4259
4260 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4261 below.
4262
4263 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4264 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4265 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4266 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4267 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4268 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4269
4270 @menu
4271 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4272 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4273 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4274 * Input Section:: Input section description
4275 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4276 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4277 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4278 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4279 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4280 @end menu
4281
4282 @node Output Section Description
4283 @subsection Output Section Description
4284 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4285 @smallexample
4286 @group
4287 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4288 [AT(@var{lma})]
4289 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4290 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4291 [@var{constraint}]
4292 @{
4293 @var{output-section-command}
4294 @var{output-section-command}
4295 @dots{}
4296 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4297 @end group
4298 @end smallexample
4299
4300 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4301
4302 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4303 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4304 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4305 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4306 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4307
4308 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4309
4310 @itemize @bullet
4311 @item
4312 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4313 @item
4314 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4315 @item
4316 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4317 @item
4318 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4319 @end itemize
4320
4321 @node Output Section Name
4322 @subsection Output Section Name
4323 @cindex name, section
4324 @cindex section name
4325 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4326 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4327 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4328 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4329 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4330 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4331 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4332 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4333 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4334 commas must be quoted.
4335
4336 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4337 Discarding}.
4338
4339 @node Output Section Address
4340 @subsection Output Section Address
4341 @cindex address, section
4342 @cindex section address
4343 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4344 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4345 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4346
4347 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4348 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4349 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4350 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4351 contained within the output section.
4352
4353 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4354
4355 @itemize @bullet
4356 @item
4357 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4358 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4359 in that region.
4360
4361 @item
4362 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4363 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4364 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4365 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4366
4367 @item
4368 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4369 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4370 counter.
4371 @end itemize
4372
4373 @noindent
4374 For example:
4375
4376 @smallexample
4377 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4378 @end smallexample
4379
4380 @noindent
4381 and
4382
4383 @smallexample
4384 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4385 @end smallexample
4386
4387 @noindent
4388 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4389 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4390 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4391 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4392 input sections.
4393
4394 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4395 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4396 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4397 do something like this:
4398 @smallexample
4399 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4400 @end smallexample
4401 @noindent
4402 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4403 aligned upward to the specified value.
4404
4405 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4406 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4407 sections are ignored).
4408
4409 @node Input Section
4410 @subsection Input Section Description
4411 @cindex input sections
4412 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4413 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4414
4415 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4416 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4417 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4418 map the input files into your memory layout.
4419
4420 @menu
4421 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4422 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4423 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4424 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4425 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4426 @end menu
4427
4428 @node Input Section Basics
4429 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4430 @cindex input section basics
4431 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4432 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4433
4434 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4435 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4436
4437 The most common input section description is to include all input
4438 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4439 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4440 @smallexample
4441 *(.text)
4442 @end smallexample
4443 @noindent
4444 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4445 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4446 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4447 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4448 example:
4449 @smallexample
4450 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4451 @end smallexample
4452 @noindent
4453 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4454 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4455 placed inside the section list, for example:
4456 @smallexample
4457 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4458 @end smallexample
4459 @noindent
4460 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4461 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4462 more than one section, as described below.
4463
4464 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4465 @smallexample
4466 *(.text .rdata)
4467 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4468 @end smallexample
4469 @noindent
4470 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4471 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4472 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4473 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4474 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4475 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4476
4477 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4478 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4479 immediately following section, for example:
4480 @smallexample
4481 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4482 @end smallexample
4483 @noindent
4484 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4485 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4486 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4487 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4488 could be modified to:
4489 @smallexample
4490 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4491 @end smallexample
4492 @noindent
4493 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4494 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4495 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4496 @smallexample
4497 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4498 @end smallexample
4499
4500 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4501 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4502 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4503 @smallexample
4504 data.o(.data)
4505 @end smallexample
4506
4507 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4508 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4509
4510 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4511
4512 @smallexample
4513 @group
4514 SECTIONS @{
4515 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4516 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4517 @}
4518 @end group
4519 @end smallexample
4520
4521 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4522 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4523 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4524 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4525 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4526
4527 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4528 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4529 with no whitespace around the colon.
4530
4531 @table @samp
4532 @item archive:file
4533 matches file within archive
4534 @item archive:
4535 matches the whole archive
4536 @item :file
4537 matches file but not one in an archive
4538 @end table
4539
4540 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4541 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4542 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4543 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4544 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4545 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4546 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4547 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4548 command.
4549
4550 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4551 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4552 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4553 @smallexample
4554 data.o
4555 @end smallexample
4556
4557 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4558 and does not contain any wild card
4559 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4560 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4561 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4562 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4563 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4564 the archive search path.
4565
4566 @node Input Section Wildcards
4567 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4568 @cindex input section wildcards
4569 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4570 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4571 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4572 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4573 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4574
4575 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4576 pattern for the file name.
4577
4578 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4579
4580 @table @samp
4581 @item *
4582 matches any number of characters
4583 @item ?
4584 matches any single character
4585 @item [@var{chars}]
4586 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4587 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4588 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4589 @item \
4590 quotes the following character
4591 @end table
4592
4593 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4594 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4595 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4596 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4597 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4598 a @samp{/} character.
4599
4600 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4601 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4602 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4603
4604 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4605 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4606 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4607 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4608 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4609 @smallexample
4610 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4611 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4612 @end smallexample
4613
4614 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4615 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4616 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4617 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4618 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4619 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4620 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4621
4622 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4623 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4624 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4625 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4626 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4627 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4628
4629 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4630 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4631 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4632 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4633 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4634
4635 @cindex SORT
4636 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4637
4638 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4639 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4640
4641 @enumerate
4642 @item
4643 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4644 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4645 sections have the same name.
4646 @item
4647 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4648 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4649 sections have the same alignment.
4650 @item
4651 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4652 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4653 @item
4654 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4655 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4656 @item
4657 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4658 @end enumerate
4659
4660 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4661 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4662 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4663
4664 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4665 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4666 treated as nested sorting command.
4667
4668 @enumerate
4669 @item
4670 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4671 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4672 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4673 @item
4674 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4675 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4676 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4677 @end enumerate
4678
4679 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4680 command-line option will be ignored.
4681
4682 @cindex SORT_NONE
4683 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4684 section sorting option.
4685
4686 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4687 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4688 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4689
4690 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4691 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4692 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4693 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4694 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4695 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4696 @smallexample
4697 @group
4698 SECTIONS @{
4699 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4700 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4701 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4702 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4703 @}
4704 @end group
4705 @end smallexample
4706
4707 @node Input Section Common
4708 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4709 @cindex common symbol placement
4710 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4711 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4712 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4713 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4714 named @samp{COMMON}.
4715
4716 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4717 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4718 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4719 input files are placed in another section.
4720
4721 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4722 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4723 @smallexample
4724 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4725 @end smallexample
4726
4727 @cindex scommon section
4728 @cindex small common symbols
4729 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4730 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4731 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4732 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4733 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4734 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4735 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4736 locations.
4737
4738 @cindex [COMMON]
4739 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4740 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4741 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4742
4743 @node Input Section Keep
4744 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4745 @cindex KEEP
4746 @cindex garbage collection
4747 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4748 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4749 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4750 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4751 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4752
4753 @node Input Section Example
4754 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4755 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4756 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4757 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4758 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4759 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4760 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4761 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4762 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4763 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4764
4765 @smallexample
4766 @group
4767 SECTIONS @{
4768 outputa 0x10000 :
4769 @{
4770 all.o
4771 foo.o (.input1)
4772 @}
4773 @end group
4774 @group
4775 outputb :
4776 @{
4777 foo.o (.input2)
4778 foo1.o (.input1)
4779 @}
4780 @end group
4781 @group
4782 outputc :
4783 @{
4784 *(.input1)
4785 *(.input2)
4786 @}
4787 @}
4788 @end group
4789 @end smallexample
4790
4791 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4792 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4793 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4794 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4795 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4796 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4797 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4798
4799 @node Output Section Data
4800 @subsection Output Section Data
4801 @cindex data
4802 @cindex section data
4803 @cindex output section data
4804 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4805 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4806 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4807 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4808 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4809 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4810 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4811 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4812 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4813 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4814 counter.
4815
4816 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4817 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4818 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4819 stored.
4820
4821 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4822 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4823 @smallexample
4824 BYTE(1)
4825 LONG(addr)
4826 @end smallexample
4827
4828 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4829 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4830 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4831 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4832 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4833
4834 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4835 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4836 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4837 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4838 endianness of the first input object file.
4839
4840 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4841 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4842 @smallexample
4843 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4844 @end smallexample
4845 whereas this will work:
4846 @smallexample
4847 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4848 @end smallexample
4849
4850 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4851 @cindex holes, filling
4852 @cindex unspecified memory
4853 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4854 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4855 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4856 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4857 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4858 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4859 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4860 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4861 different parts of an output section.
4862
4863 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4864 value @samp{0x90}:
4865 @smallexample
4866 FILL(0x90909090)
4867 @end smallexample
4868
4869 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4870 section attribute, but it only affects the
4871 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4872 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4873 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4874 expression.
4875
4876 @node Output Section Keywords
4877 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4878 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4879 commands.
4880
4881 @table @code
4882 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4883 @cindex input filename symbols
4884 @cindex filename symbols
4885 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4886 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4887 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4888 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4889 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4890
4891 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4892 normally used for any other object file format.
4893
4894 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4895 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4896 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4897 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4898 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4899 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4900 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4901 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4902 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4903 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4904 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4905 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4906 ignored for other object file formats.
4907
4908 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4909 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4910 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4911 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4912 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4913 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4914 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4915 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4916 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4917 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4918 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4919 @code{exit}.
4920
4921 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4922 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4923 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4924 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4925 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4926 runtime code expects to see.
4927
4928 @smallexample
4929 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4930 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4931 *(.ctors)
4932 LONG(0)
4933 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4934 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4935 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4936 *(.dtors)
4937 LONG(0)
4938 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4939 @end smallexample
4940
4941 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4942 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4943 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4944 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4945 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4946 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4947 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4948 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4949
4950 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4951 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4952 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4953 scripts.
4954
4955 @end table
4956
4957 @node Output Section Discarding
4958 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4959 @cindex discarding sections
4960 @cindex sections, discarding
4961 @cindex removing sections
4962 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4963 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4964 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4965 @smallexample
4966 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4967 @end smallexample
4968 @noindent
4969 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4970 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4971 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4972 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4973 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4974 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4975 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4976 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4977 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4978
4979 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4980 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4981 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4982 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4983 section is discarded.
4984
4985 @cindex /DISCARD/
4986 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4987 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4988 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4989
4990 @node Output Section Attributes
4991 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4992 @cindex output section attributes
4993 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4994 like this:
4995
4996 @smallexample
4997 @group
4998 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4999 [AT(@var{lma})]
5000 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5001 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5002 [@var{constraint}]
5003 @{
5004 @var{output-section-command}
5005 @var{output-section-command}
5006 @dots{}
5007 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5008 @end group
5009 @end smallexample
5010
5011 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5012 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5013 remaining section attributes.
5014
5015 @menu
5016 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5017 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5018 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5019 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5020 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5021 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5022 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5023 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5024 @end menu
5025
5026 @node Output Section Type
5027 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5028 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5029 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5030
5031 @table @code
5032 @item NOLOAD
5033 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5034 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5035 @item DSECT
5036 @itemx COPY
5037 @itemx INFO
5038 @itemx OVERLAY
5039 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5040 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5041 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5042 section when the program is run.
5043 @end table
5044
5045 @kindex NOLOAD
5046 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5047 @cindex loading, preventing
5048 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5049 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5050 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5051 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5052 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5053 @smallexample
5054 @group
5055 SECTIONS @{
5056 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5057 @dots{}
5058 @}
5059 @end group
5060 @end smallexample
5061
5062 @node Output Section LMA
5063 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5064 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5065 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5066 @cindex load address
5067 @cindex section load address
5068 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5069 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5070 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5071 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5072 address is optional.
5073
5074 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5075 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5076 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5077 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5078 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5079
5080 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5081 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5082 load address:
5083
5084 @itemize @bullet
5085 @item
5086 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5087 the LMA address as well.
5088
5089 @item
5090 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5091
5092 @item
5093 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5094 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5095 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5096 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5097 the last section in the located region.
5098
5099 @item
5100 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5101 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5102
5103 @item
5104 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5105 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5106 @end itemize
5107
5108 @cindex ROM initialized data
5109 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5110 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5111 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5112 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5113 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5114 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5115 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5116 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5117 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5118
5119 @smallexample
5120 @group
5121 SECTIONS
5122 @{
5123 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5124 .mdata 0x2000 :
5125 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5126 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5127 .bss 0x3000 :
5128 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5129 @}
5130 @end group
5131 @end smallexample
5132
5133 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5134 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5135 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5136 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5137 script.
5138
5139 @smallexample
5140 @group
5141 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5142 char *src = &_etext;
5143 char *dst = &_data;
5144
5145 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5146 while (dst < &_edata)
5147 *dst++ = *src++;
5148
5149 /* Zero bss. */
5150 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5151 *dst = 0;
5152 @end group
5153 @end smallexample
5154
5155 @node Forced Output Alignment
5156 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5157 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5158 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5159 @cindex output section alignment
5160 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5161 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5162 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5163
5164 @node Forced Input Alignment
5165 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5166 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5167 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5168 @cindex input section alignment
5169 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5170 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5171 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5172
5173 @node Output Section Constraint
5174 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5175 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5176 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5177 @cindex constraints on output sections
5178 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5179 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5180 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5181 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5182
5183 @node Output Section Region
5184 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5185 @kindex >@var{region}
5186 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5187 @cindex memory regions and sections
5188 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5189 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5190
5191 Here is a simple example:
5192 @smallexample
5193 @group
5194 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5195 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5196 @end group
5197 @end smallexample
5198
5199 @node Output Section Phdr
5200 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5201 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5202 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5203 @cindex program headers and sections
5204 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5205 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5206 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5207 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5208 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5209 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5210
5211 Here is a simple example:
5212 @smallexample
5213 @group
5214 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5215 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5216 @end group
5217 @end smallexample
5218
5219 @node Output Section Fill
5220 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5221 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5222 @cindex section fill pattern
5223 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5224 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5225 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5226 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5227 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5228 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5229 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5230 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5231 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5232 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5233 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5234 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5235 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5236
5237 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5238 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5239
5240 Here is a simple example:
5241 @smallexample
5242 @group
5243 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5244 @end group
5245 @end smallexample
5246
5247 @node Overlay Description
5248 @subsection Overlay Description
5249 @kindex OVERLAY
5250 @cindex overlays
5251 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5252 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5253 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5254 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5255 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5256 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5257 than another.
5258
5259 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5260 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5261 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5262 command is as follows:
5263 @smallexample
5264 @group
5265 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5266 @{
5267 @var{secname1}
5268 @{
5269 @var{output-section-command}
5270 @var{output-section-command}
5271 @dots{}
5272 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5273 @var{secname2}
5274 @{
5275 @var{output-section-command}
5276 @var{output-section-command}
5277 @dots{}
5278 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5279 @dots{}
5280 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5281 @end group
5282 @end smallexample
5283
5284 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5285 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5286 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5287 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5288 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5289 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5290
5291 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5292 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5293
5294 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5295 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5296 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5297 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5298 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5299 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5300
5301 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5302 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5303 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5304 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5305 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5306
5307 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5308 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5309 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5310 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5311 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5312 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5313 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5314
5315 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5316 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5317
5318 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5319 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5320 @smallexample
5321 @group
5322 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5323 @{
5324 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5325 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5326 @}
5327 @end group
5328 @end smallexample
5329 @noindent
5330 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5331 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5332 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5333 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5334 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5335 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5336
5337 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5338 like the following.
5339
5340 @smallexample
5341 @group
5342 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5343 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5344 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5345 @end group
5346 @end smallexample
5347
5348 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5349 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5350 example could have been written identically as follows.
5351
5352 @smallexample
5353 @group
5354 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5355 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5356 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5357 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5358 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5359 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5360 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5361 @end group
5362 @end smallexample
5363
5364 @node MEMORY
5365 @section MEMORY Command
5366 @kindex MEMORY
5367 @cindex memory regions
5368 @cindex regions of memory
5369 @cindex allocating memory
5370 @cindex discontinuous memory
5371 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5372 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5373
5374 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5375 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5376 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5377 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5378 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5379 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5380 around to fit into the available regions.
5381
5382 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5383 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5384 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5385 @code{MEMORY} is:
5386 @smallexample
5387 @group
5388 MEMORY
5389 @{
5390 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5391 @dots{}
5392 @}
5393 @end group
5394 @end smallexample
5395
5396 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5397 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5398 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5399 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5400 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5401 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5402 command.
5403
5404 @cindex memory region attributes
5405 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5406 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5407 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5408 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5409 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5410 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5411 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5412
5413 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5414 @table @samp
5415 @item R
5416 Read-only section
5417 @item W
5418 Read/write section
5419 @item X
5420 Executable section
5421 @item A
5422 Allocatable section
5423 @item I
5424 Initialized section
5425 @item L
5426 Same as @samp{I}
5427 @item !
5428 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5429 @end table
5430
5431 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5432 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5433 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5434 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5435 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5436 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5437 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5438 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5439
5440 @kindex ORIGIN =
5441 @kindex o =
5442 @kindex org =
5443 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5444 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5445 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5446 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5447 @code{ORG}).
5448
5449 @kindex LENGTH =
5450 @kindex len =
5451 @kindex l =
5452 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5453 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5454 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5455 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5456
5457 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5458 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5459 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5460 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5461 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5462 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5463 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5464 region.
5465
5466 @smallexample
5467 @group
5468 MEMORY
5469 @{
5470 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5471 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5472 @}
5473 @end group
5474 @end smallexample
5475
5476 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5477 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5478 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5479 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5480 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5481 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5482 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5483 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5484 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5485
5486 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5487 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5488 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5489
5490 @smallexample
5491 @group
5492 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5493 @end group
5494 @end smallexample
5495
5496 @node PHDRS
5497 @section PHDRS Command
5498 @kindex PHDRS
5499 @cindex program headers
5500 @cindex ELF program headers
5501 @cindex program segments
5502 @cindex segments, ELF
5503 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5504 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5505 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5506 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5507
5508 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5509 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5510 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5511 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5512 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5513
5514 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5515 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5516 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5517 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5518 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5519
5520 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5521 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5522 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5523
5524 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5525 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5526
5527 @smallexample
5528 @group
5529 PHDRS
5530 @{
5531 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5532 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5533 @}
5534 @end group
5535 @end smallexample
5536
5537 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5538 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5539 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5540 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5541 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5542 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5543
5544 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5545 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5546 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5547 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5548 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5549 Section Phdr}.
5550
5551 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5552 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5553 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5554 contain the section.
5555
5556 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5557 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5558 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5559 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5560 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5561 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5562 segment at all.
5563
5564 @kindex FILEHDR
5565 @kindex PHDRS
5566 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5567 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5568 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5569 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5570 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5571 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5572 these keywords.
5573
5574 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5575 value of the keyword.
5576
5577 @table @asis
5578 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5579 Indicates an unused program header.
5580
5581 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5582 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5583 the file.
5584
5585 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5586 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5587
5588 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5589 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5590 found.
5591
5592 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5593 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5594
5595 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5596 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5597 ABI.
5598
5599 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5600 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5601
5602 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5603 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5604
5605 @item @var{expression}
5606 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5607 be used for types not defined above.
5608 @end table
5609
5610 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5611 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5612 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5613 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5614 output section attribute.
5615
5616 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5617 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5618 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5619 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5620 header.
5621
5622 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5623 headers used on a native ELF system.
5624
5625 @example
5626 @group
5627 PHDRS
5628 @{
5629 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5630 interp PT_INTERP ;
5631 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5632 data PT_LOAD ;
5633 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5634 @}
5635
5636 SECTIONS
5637 @{
5638 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5639 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5640 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5641 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5642 @dots{}
5643 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5644 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5645 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5646 @dots{}
5647 @}
5648 @end group
5649 @end example
5650
5651 @node VERSION
5652 @section VERSION Command
5653 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5654 @cindex symbol versions
5655 @cindex version script
5656 @cindex versions of symbols
5657 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5658 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5659 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5660 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5661 shared library.
5662
5663 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5664 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5665 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5666
5667 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5668 @smallexample
5669 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5670 @end smallexample
5671
5672 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5673 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5674 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5675 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5676 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5677 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5678 library.
5679
5680 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5681 examples.
5682
5683 @smallexample
5684 VERS_1.1 @{
5685 global:
5686 foo1;
5687 local:
5688 old*;
5689 original*;
5690 new*;
5691 @};
5692
5693 VERS_1.2 @{
5694 foo2;
5695 @} VERS_1.1;
5696
5697 VERS_2.0 @{
5698 bar1; bar2;
5699 extern "C++" @{
5700 ns::*;
5701 "f(int, double)";
5702 @};
5703 @} VERS_1.2;
5704 @end smallexample
5705
5706 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5707 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5708 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5709 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5710 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5711 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5712 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5713 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5714 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5715 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5716
5717 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5718 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5719 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5720
5721 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5722 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5723 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5724
5725 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5726 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5727 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5728 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5729 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5730 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5731 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5732 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5733 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5734
5735 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5736 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5737 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5738 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5739
5740 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5741 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5742 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5743 won't.
5744
5745 @smallexample
5746 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5747 @end smallexample
5748
5749 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5750 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5751 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5752 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5753 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5754 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5755 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5756 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5757 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5758 search for each symbol reference.
5759
5760 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5761 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5762 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5763 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5764 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5765 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5766 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5767 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5768 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5769
5770 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5771 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5772 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5773 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5774 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5775 @smallexample
5776 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5777 @end smallexample
5778 @noindent
5779 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5780 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5781 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5782 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5783 takes precedence over a version script.
5784
5785 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5786 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5787 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5788 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5789 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5790
5791 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5792 source file. Here is an example:
5793
5794 @smallexample
5795 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5796 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5797 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5798 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5799 @end smallexample
5800
5801 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5802 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5803 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5804 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5805
5806 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5807 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5808 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5809 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5810 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5811 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5812
5813 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5814 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5815 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5816 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5817
5818 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5819
5820 @smallexample
5821 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5822 @end smallexample
5823
5824 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5825 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5826 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5827 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5828 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5829
5830 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5831 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5832 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5833 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5834 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5835 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5836 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5837 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5838 expect when you upgrade.
5839
5840 @node Expressions
5841 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5842 @cindex expressions
5843 @cindex arithmetic
5844 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5845 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5846 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5847 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5848
5849 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5850
5851 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5852 expressions.
5853
5854 @menu
5855 * Constants:: Constants
5856 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5857 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5858 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5859 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5860 * Operators:: Operators
5861 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5862 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5863 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5864 @end menu
5865
5866 @node Constants
5867 @subsection Constants
5868 @cindex integer notation
5869 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5870 All constants are integers.
5871
5872 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5873 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5874 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5875 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5876 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5877 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5878
5879 @cindex scaled integers
5880 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5881 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5882 @cindex suffixes for integers
5883 @cindex integer suffixes
5884 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5885 constant by
5886 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5887 @ifnottex
5888 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5889 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5890 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5891 @end ifnottex
5892 @tex
5893 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5894 @end tex
5895 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5896 respectively. For example, the following
5897 all refer to the same quantity:
5898
5899 @smallexample
5900 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5901 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5902 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5903 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5904 @end smallexample
5905
5906 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5907 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5908
5909 @node Symbolic Constants
5910 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5911 @cindex symbolic constants
5912 @kindex CONSTANT
5913 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5914 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5915
5916 @table @code
5917 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5918 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5919 The target's maximum page size.
5920
5921 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5922 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5923 The target's default page size.
5924 @end table
5925
5926 So for example:
5927
5928 @smallexample
5929 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5930 @end smallexample
5931
5932 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5933 supported by the target.
5934
5935 @node Symbols
5936 @subsection Symbol Names
5937 @cindex symbol names
5938 @cindex names
5939 @cindex quoted symbol names
5940 @kindex "
5941 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5942 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5943 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5944 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5945 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5946 @smallexample
5947 "SECTION" = 9;
5948 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5949 @end smallexample
5950
5951 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5952 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5953 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5954
5955 @node Orphan Sections
5956 @subsection Orphan Sections
5957 @cindex orphan
5958 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5959 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5960 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5961 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5962 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5963
5964 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5965 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5966 placed at the end of that output section.
5967
5968 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5969 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5970 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5971 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5972 one new output section.
5973
5974 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5975 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5976 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5977 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5978 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5979 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5980 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5981
5982 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5983 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
5984 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5985
5986 @node Location Counter
5987 @subsection The Location Counter
5988 @kindex .
5989 @cindex dot
5990 @cindex location counter
5991 @cindex current output location
5992 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5993 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5994 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5995 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5996 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5997
5998 @cindex holes
5999 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6000 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6001 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6002 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6003 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6004
6005 @smallexample
6006 SECTIONS
6007 @{
6008 output :
6009 @{
6010 file1(.text)
6011 . = . + 1000;
6012 file2(.text)
6013 . += 1000;
6014 file3(.text)
6015 @} = 0x12345678;
6016 @}
6017 @end smallexample
6018 @noindent
6019 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6020 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6021 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6022 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6023 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6024 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6025
6026 @cindex dot inside sections
6027 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6028 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6029 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6030 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6031 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6032 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6033
6034 @smallexample
6035 SECTIONS
6036 @{
6037 . = 0x100
6038 .text: @{
6039 *(.text)
6040 . = 0x200
6041 @}
6042 . = 0x500
6043 .data: @{
6044 *(.data)
6045 . += 0x600
6046 @}
6047 @}
6048 @end smallexample
6049
6050 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6051 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6052 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6053 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6054 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6055 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6056 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6057 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6058
6059 @cindex dot outside sections
6060 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6061 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6062 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6063
6064 @smallexample
6065 SECTIONS
6066 @{
6067 start_of_text = . ;
6068 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6069 end_of_text = . ;
6070
6071 start_of_data = . ;
6072 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6073 end_of_data = . ;
6074 @}
6075 @end smallexample
6076
6077 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6078 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6079 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6080 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6081 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6082 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6083 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6084 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6085 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6086 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6087 as follows:
6088
6089 @smallexample
6090 SECTIONS
6091 @{
6092 start_of_text = . ;
6093 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6094 end_of_text = . ;
6095
6096 start_of_data = . ;
6097 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6098 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6099 end_of_data = . ;
6100 @}
6101 @end smallexample
6102
6103 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6104 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6105 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6106 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6107 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6108 section. So you could write:
6109
6110 @smallexample
6111 SECTIONS
6112 @{
6113 start_of_text = . ;
6114 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6115 end_of_text = . ;
6116
6117 . = . ;
6118 start_of_data = . ;
6119 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6120 end_of_data = . ;
6121 @}
6122 @end smallexample
6123
6124 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6125 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6126
6127 @need 2000
6128 @node Operators
6129 @subsection Operators
6130 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6131 @cindex arithmetic operators
6132 @cindex precedence in expressions
6133 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6134 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6135 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6136 @ifnottex
6137 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6138 @smallexample
6139 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6140 (highest)
6141 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6142 2 left * / %
6143 3 left + -
6144 4 left >> <<
6145 5 left == != > < <= >=
6146 6 left &
6147 7 left |
6148 8 left &&
6149 9 left ||
6150 10 right ? :
6151 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6152 (lowest)
6153 @end smallexample
6154 Notes:
6155 (1) Prefix operators
6156 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6157 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6158 @end ifnottex
6159 @tex
6160 \vskip \baselineskip
6161 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6162 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6163 \hrule
6164 \halign
6165 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6166 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6167 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6168 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6169 \noalign{\hrule}
6170 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6171 &highest&&&&&\cr
6172 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6173 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6174 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6175 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6176 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6177 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6178 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6179 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6180 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6181 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6182 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6183 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6184 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6185 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6186 \hrule}
6187 @end tex
6188 @iftex
6189 {
6190 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6191 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6192 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6193 }
6194 @end iftex
6195 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6196
6197 @node Evaluation
6198 @subsection Evaluation
6199 @cindex lazy evaluation
6200 @cindex expression evaluation order
6201 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6202 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6203
6204 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6205 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6206 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6207 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6208
6209 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6210 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6211 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6212 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6213
6214 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6215 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6216 allocation.
6217
6218 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6219 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6220
6221 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6222 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6223 following
6224 @smallexample
6225 @group
6226 SECTIONS
6227 @{
6228 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6229 @{ *(.text) @}
6230 @}
6231 @end group
6232 @end smallexample
6233 @noindent
6234 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6235 address}.
6236
6237 @node Expression Section
6238 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6239 @cindex expression sections
6240 @cindex absolute expressions
6241 @cindex relative expressions
6242 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6243 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6244 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6245 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6246 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6247 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6248 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6249 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6250 operations.
6251
6252 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6253 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6254 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6255 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6256 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6257 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6258 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6259 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6260 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6261 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6262 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6263 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6264 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6265 everywhere.
6266
6267 In the following simple example,
6268
6269 @smallexample
6270 @group
6271 SECTIONS
6272 @{
6273 . = 0x100;
6274 __executable_start = 0x100;
6275 .data :
6276 @{
6277 . = 0x10;
6278 __data_start = 0x10;
6279 *(.data)
6280 @}
6281 @dots{}
6282 @}
6283 @end group
6284 @end smallexample
6285
6286 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6287 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6288 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6289 section in the second two assignments.
6290
6291 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6292 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6293
6294 @itemize @bullet
6295 @item
6296 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6297 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6298 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6299 @item
6300 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6301 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6302 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6303 @item
6304 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6305 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6306 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6307 before applying the operator.
6308 @end itemize
6309
6310 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6311
6312 @itemize @bullet
6313 @item
6314 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6315 @item
6316 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6317 @item
6318 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6319 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6320 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6321 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6322 but an absolute address otherwise.
6323 @item
6324 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6325 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6326 section as the relative operand(s).
6327 @item
6328 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6329 conversions) is an absolute address.
6330 @end itemize
6331
6332 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6333 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6334 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6335 section @samp{.data}:
6336 @smallexample
6337 SECTIONS
6338 @{
6339 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6340 @}
6341 @end smallexample
6342 @noindent
6343 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6344 @samp{.data} section.
6345
6346 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6347 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6348
6349 @node Builtin Functions
6350 @subsection Builtin Functions
6351 @cindex functions in expressions
6352 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6353 use in linker script expressions.
6354
6355 @table @code
6356 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6357 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6358 @cindex expression, absolute
6359 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6360 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6361 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6362 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6363
6364 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6365 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6366 @cindex section address in expression
6367 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6368 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6369 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6370 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6371 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6372 the other two will be absolute:
6373 @smallexample
6374 @group
6375 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6376 .output1 :
6377 @{
6378 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6379 @dots{}
6380 @}
6381 .output :
6382 @{
6383 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6384 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6385 @}
6386 @dots{} @}
6387 @end group
6388 @end smallexample
6389
6390 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6391 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6392 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6393 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6394 @cindex round up location counter
6395 @cindex align location counter
6396 @cindex round up expression
6397 @cindex align expression
6398 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6399 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6400 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6401 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6402 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6403 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6404
6405 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6406 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6407 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6408 input sections:
6409 @smallexample
6410 @group
6411 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6412 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6413 *(.data)
6414 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6415 @}
6416 @dots{} @}
6417 @end group
6418 @end smallexample
6419 @noindent
6420 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6421 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6422 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6423 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6424
6425 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6426
6427 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6428 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6429 @cindex section alignment
6430 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6431 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6432 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6433 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6434 value in that section.
6435 @smallexample
6436 @group
6437 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6438 .output @{
6439 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6440 @dots{}
6441 @}
6442 @dots{} @}
6443 @end group
6444 @end smallexample
6445
6446 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6447 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6448 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6449 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6450 section.
6451
6452 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6453 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6454 This is equivalent to either
6455 @smallexample
6456 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6457 @end smallexample
6458 or
6459 @smallexample
6460 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6461 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6462 @end smallexample
6463 @noindent
6464 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6465 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6466 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6467 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6468 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6469 bytes in the on-disk file.
6470
6471 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6472 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6473 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6474 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6475 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6476 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6477 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6478
6479 @noindent
6480 Example:
6481 @smallexample
6482 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6483 @end smallexample
6484
6485 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6486 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6487 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6488 evaluation purposes.
6489
6490 @smallexample
6491 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6492 @end smallexample
6493
6494 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6495 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6496 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6497 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6498 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6499 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6500 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6501 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6502 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6503 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6504 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6505 section alignment.
6506
6507 @smallexample
6508 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6509 @end smallexample
6510
6511 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6512 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6513 @cindex symbol defaults
6514 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6515 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6516 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6517 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6518 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6519 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6520 existed, its value is preserved:
6521
6522 @smallexample
6523 @group
6524 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6525 .text : @{
6526 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6527 @dots{}
6528 @}
6529 @dots{}
6530 @}
6531 @end group
6532 @end smallexample
6533
6534 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6535 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6536 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6537
6538 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6539 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6540 @cindex section load address in expression
6541 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6542 Section LMA}).
6543
6544 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6545 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6546 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6547 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6548
6549 @kindex MAX
6550 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6551 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6552
6553 @kindex MIN
6554 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6555 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6556
6557 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6558 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6559 @cindex unallocated address, next
6560 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6561 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6562 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6563 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6564
6565 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6566 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6567 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6568
6569 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6570 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6571 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6572 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6573 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6574 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6575 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6576 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6577 name.
6578
6579 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6580 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6581 @cindex section size
6582 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6583 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6584 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6585 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6586 @smallexample
6587 @group
6588 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6589 .output @{
6590 .start = . ;
6591 @dots{}
6592 .end = . ;
6593 @}
6594 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6595 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6596 @dots{} @}
6597 @end group
6598 @end smallexample
6599
6600 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6601 @itemx sizeof_headers
6602 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6603 @cindex header size
6604 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6605 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6606 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6607 choose, to facilitate paging.
6608
6609 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6610 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6611 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6612 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6613 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6614 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6615 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6616 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6617 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6618 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6619 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6620 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6621 @end table
6622
6623 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6624 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6625 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6626 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6627 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6628 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6629 linker will report an error.
6630
6631 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6632
6633 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6634 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6635 commands.
6636
6637 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6638 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6639 read. This can affect archive searching.
6640
6641 @ifset GENERIC
6642 @node Machine Dependent
6643 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6644
6645 @cindex machine dependencies
6646 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6647 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6648 functionality are not listed.
6649
6650 @menu
6651 @ifset H8300
6652 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6653 @end ifset
6654 @ifset M68HC11
6655 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6656 @end ifset
6657 @ifset ARM
6658 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6659 @end ifset
6660 @ifset HPPA
6661 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6662 @end ifset
6663 @ifset M68K
6664 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6665 @end ifset
6666 @ifset MIPS
6667 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6668 @end ifset
6669 @ifset MMIX
6670 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6671 @end ifset
6672 @ifset MSP430
6673 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6674 @end ifset
6675 @ifset NDS32
6676 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6677 @end ifset
6678 @ifset NIOSII
6679 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6680 @end ifset
6681 @ifset POWERPC
6682 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6683 @end ifset
6684 @ifset POWERPC64
6685 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6686 @end ifset
6687 @ifset S/390
6688 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6689 @end ifset
6690 @ifset SPU
6691 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6692 @end ifset
6693 @ifset TICOFF
6694 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6695 @end ifset
6696 @ifset WIN32
6697 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6698 @end ifset
6699 @ifset XTENSA
6700 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6701 @end ifset
6702 @end menu
6703 @end ifset
6704
6705 @ifset H8300
6706 @ifclear GENERIC
6707 @raisesections
6708 @end ifclear
6709
6710 @node H8/300
6711 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6712
6713 @cindex H8/300 support
6714 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6715 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6716
6717 @table @emph
6718 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6719 @item relaxing address modes
6720 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6721 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6722 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6723 respectively.
6724
6725 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6726 @item synthesizing instructions
6727 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6728 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6729 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6730 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6731 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6732 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6733 top page of memory).
6734
6735 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6736 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6737 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6738 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6739 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6740 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6741 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6742
6743 @item bit manipulation instructions
6744 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6745 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6746 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6747 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6748 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6749 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6750 the top page of memory).
6751
6752 @item system control instructions
6753 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6754 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6755 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6756 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6757 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6758 the top page of memory).
6759 @end table
6760
6761 @ifclear GENERIC
6762 @lowersections
6763 @end ifclear
6764 @end ifset
6765
6766 @ifclear GENERIC
6767 @ifset Renesas
6768 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6769 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6770 @node Renesas
6771 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6772
6773 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6774 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6775 options are required for these chips.
6776 @end ifset
6777 @end ifclear
6778
6779 @ifset ARM
6780 @ifclear GENERIC
6781 @raisesections
6782 @end ifclear
6783
6784 @ifset M68HC11
6785 @ifclear GENERIC
6786 @raisesections
6787 @end ifclear
6788
6789 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6790 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6791
6792 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6793
6794 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6795
6796 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6797 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6798
6799 @table @emph
6800 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6801 @item relaxing address modes
6802 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6803 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6804 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6805 respectively.
6806
6807 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6808 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6809 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6810
6811 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6812 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6813 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6814 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6815 @code{bset} instructions.
6816
6817 @end table
6818
6819 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6820
6821 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6822 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6823 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6824 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6825 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6826 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6827 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6828 point to the function trampoline.
6829
6830 @ifclear GENERIC
6831 @lowersections
6832 @end ifclear
6833 @end ifset
6834
6835 @node ARM
6836 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6837
6838 @cindex ARM interworking support
6839 @kindex --support-old-code
6840 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6841 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6842 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6843 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6844 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6845 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6846 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6847 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6848 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6849 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6850
6851 @cindex thumb entry point
6852 @cindex entry point, thumb
6853 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6854 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6855 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6856 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6857 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6858 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6859
6860 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6861 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6862 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6863 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6864 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6865 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6866
6867 @cindex BE8
6868 @kindex --be8
6869 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6870 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6871 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6872 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6873 little-endian code.
6874
6875 @cindex TARGET1
6876 @kindex --target1-rel
6877 @kindex --target1-abs
6878 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6879 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6880 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6881 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6882
6883 @cindex TARGET2
6884 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6885 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6886 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6887 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6888 @table @samp
6889 @item rel
6890 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6891 @item abs
6892 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6893 @item got-rel
6894 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6895 @end table
6896
6897 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6898 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6899 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6900 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6901 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6902 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6903
6904 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6905 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6906 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6907
6908 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6909 relocations are ignored.
6910
6911 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6912 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6913 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6914 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6915
6916 @smallexample
6917 TST rM, #1
6918 MOVEQ PC, rM
6919 BX Rn
6920 @end smallexample
6921
6922 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6923 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6924 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6925
6926 @cindex USE_BLX
6927 @kindex --use-blx
6928 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6929 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6930 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6931 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6932 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6933
6934 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6935 specify it if you are using that target.
6936
6937 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6938 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6939 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6940 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6941 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6942 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6943 the support code can read the intended values.
6944
6945 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6946 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6947 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6948 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6949 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6950 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6951
6952 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6953 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6954 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6955 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6956 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6957 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6958
6959 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6960 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6961 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6962 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6963 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6964 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6965 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6966
6967 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6968 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6969 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6970 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6971 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6972 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6973 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6974
6975 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6976 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6977 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6978
6979 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6980 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6981
6982 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6983 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6984 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6985 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6986 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6987 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6988 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6989 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6990
6991 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6992 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6993
6994 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6995 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6996 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6997 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6998 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6999
7000 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7001 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7002 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7003 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7004 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7005 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7006
7007 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7008 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7009
7010 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7011 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7012 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7013 occurs.
7014
7015 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7016 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7017 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7018 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7019 occurs.
7020
7021 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7022 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7023 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7024 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7025 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7026 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7027 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7028 not be diagnosed.
7029
7030 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7031 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7032 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7033 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7034 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7035 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7036 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7037
7038 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7039 @kindex --pic-veneer
7040 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7041 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7042 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7043 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7044
7045 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7046 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7047 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7048 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7049 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7050 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7051 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7052 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7053 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7054 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7055 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7056 where they should be placed.
7057
7058 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7059 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7060 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7061 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7062 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7063 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7064 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7065 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7066 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7067 from the input sections.
7068
7069 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7070 @samp{N = +1}.
7071
7072 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7073 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7074 otherwise.
7075
7076 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7077 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7078 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7079 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7080
7081 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7082
7083 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7084 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7085 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7086 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7087
7088 Please contact ARM for further details.
7089
7090 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7091 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7092 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7093 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7094
7095 @kindex --long-plt
7096 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7097 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7098 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7099 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7100
7101 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7102 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7103 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7104 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7105
7106 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7107 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7108 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7109 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7110 veneers in memory.
7111
7112 @kindex --cmse-implib
7113 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7114 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7115 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7116 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7117 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7118
7119 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7120 @cindex Input import library
7121 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7122 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7123 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7124 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7125 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7126 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7127 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7128 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7129 specified.
7130
7131 @ifclear GENERIC
7132 @lowersections
7133 @end ifclear
7134 @end ifset
7135
7136 @ifset HPPA
7137 @ifclear GENERIC
7138 @raisesections
7139 @end ifclear
7140
7141 @node HPPA ELF32
7142 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7143 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7144 @kindex --multi-subspace
7145 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7146 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7147 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7148 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7149 multiple sub-spaces.
7150
7151 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7152 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7153 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7154 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7155 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7156 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7157 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7158 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7159 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7160 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7161 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7162 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7163 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7164 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7165 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7166 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7167
7168 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7169 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7170 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7171 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7172
7173 @ifclear GENERIC
7174 @lowersections
7175 @end ifclear
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @ifset M68K
7179 @ifclear GENERIC
7180 @raisesections
7181 @end ifclear
7182
7183 @node M68K
7184 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7185
7186 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7187 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7188 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7189 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7190 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7191 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7192 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7193 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7194 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7195 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7196 support such GOTs.
7197 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7198 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7199 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7200 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7201
7202 @ifclear GENERIC
7203 @lowersections
7204 @end ifclear
7205 @end ifset
7206
7207 @ifset MIPS
7208 @ifclear GENERIC
7209 @raisesections
7210 @end ifclear
7211
7212 @node MIPS
7213 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7214
7215 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7216 @kindex --insn32
7217 @kindex --no-insn32
7218 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7219 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7220 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7221 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7222 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7223 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7224
7225 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7226 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7227 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7228 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7229 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7230 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7231 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7232 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7233 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7234 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7235 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7236 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7237
7238 @ifclear GENERIC
7239 @lowersections
7240 @end ifclear
7241 @end ifset
7242
7243 @ifset MMIX
7244 @ifclear GENERIC
7245 @raisesections
7246 @end ifclear
7247
7248 @node MMIX
7249 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7250 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7251 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7252 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7253 can translate between the two formats.
7254
7255 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7256 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7257 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7258 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7259 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7260 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7261 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7262 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7263
7264 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7265 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7266 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7267 of a section.
7268
7269 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7270 are left out from an mmo file.
7271
7272 @ifclear GENERIC
7273 @lowersections
7274 @end ifclear
7275 @end ifset
7276
7277 @ifset MSP430
7278 @ifclear GENERIC
7279 @raisesections
7280 @end ifclear
7281
7282 @node MSP430
7283 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7284 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7285 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7286 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7287
7288 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7289 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7290
7291 @table @code
7292 @item @samp{.vectors}
7293 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7294
7295 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7296 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7297 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7298
7299 @item @samp{.infomem}
7300 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7301 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7302
7303 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7304 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7305 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7306
7307 @item @samp{.noinit}
7308 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7309
7310 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7311 @end table
7312
7313 @table @option
7314 @cindex MSP430 Options
7315 @kindex --code-region
7316 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7317 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7318 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7319 using this option.
7320
7321 @kindex --data-region
7322 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7323 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7324 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7325 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7326
7327 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7328 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7329 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7330 and @code{--data-region} options.
7331 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7332 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7333 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7334 @end table
7335
7336 @ifclear GENERIC
7337 @lowersections
7338 @end ifclear
7339 @end ifset
7340
7341 @ifset NDS32
7342 @ifclear GENERIC
7343 @raisesections
7344 @end ifclear
7345
7346 @node NDS32
7347 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7348 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7349 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7350 relaxes objects according to these options.
7351
7352 @table @code
7353 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7354 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7355
7356 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7357 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7358
7359 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7360 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7361
7362 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7363 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7364
7365 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7366 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7367
7368 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7369 Update the existing EX9 table.
7370
7371 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7372 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7373
7374 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7375 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7376
7377 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7378 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7379
7380 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7381 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7382 @end table
7383
7384 @ifclear GENERIC
7385 @lowersections
7386 @end ifclear
7387 @end ifset
7388
7389 @ifset NIOSII
7390 @ifclear GENERIC
7391 @raisesections
7392 @end ifclear
7393
7394 @node Nios II
7395 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7396 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7397 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7398
7399 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7400 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7401 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7402 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7403 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7404 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7405 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7406 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7407 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7408 larger than 256MB.
7409
7410 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7411 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7412 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7413 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7414 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7415 register as a temporary.
7416
7417 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7418 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7419 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7420
7421 @ifclear GENERIC
7422 @lowersections
7423 @end ifclear
7424 @end ifset
7425
7426 @ifset POWERPC
7427 @ifclear GENERIC
7428 @raisesections
7429 @end ifclear
7430
7431 @node PowerPC ELF32
7432 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7433 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7434 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7435 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7436 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7437 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7438 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7439 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7440 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7441 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7442 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7443 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7444 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7445
7446 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7447 @table @option
7448 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7449 @kindex --bss-plt
7450 @item --bss-plt
7451 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7452 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7453 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7454 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7455 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7456 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7457 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7458 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7459
7460 @kindex --secure-plt
7461 @item --secure-plt
7462 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7463 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7464 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7465 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7466 style BSS PLT.
7467
7468 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7469 @kindex --sdata-got
7470 @item --sdata-got
7471 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7472 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7473 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7474 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7475 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7476 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7477 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7478 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7479 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7480 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7481 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7482 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7483
7484 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7485 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7486 @item --emit-stub-syms
7487 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7488 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7489
7490 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7491 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7492 @item --no-tls-optimize
7493 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7494 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7495 disable the optimization.
7496 @end table
7497
7498 @ifclear GENERIC
7499 @lowersections
7500 @end ifclear
7501 @end ifset
7502
7503 @ifset POWERPC64
7504 @ifclear GENERIC
7505 @raisesections
7506 @end ifclear
7507
7508 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7509 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7510
7511 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7512 @table @option
7513 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7514 @kindex --stub-group-size
7515 @item --stub-group-size
7516 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7517 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7518 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7519 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7520 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7521 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7522 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7523 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7524 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7525 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7526 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7527 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7528 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7529 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7530
7531 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7532 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7533 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7534 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7535
7536 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7537 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7538 @item --emit-stub-syms
7539 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7540 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7541
7542 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7543 @kindex --dotsyms
7544 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7545 @item --dotsyms
7546 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7547 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7548 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7549 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7550 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7551 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7552 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7553 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7554 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7555 feature.
7556
7557 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7558 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7559 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7560 @item --save-restore-funcs
7561 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7562 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7563 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7564 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7565 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7566 link.
7567
7568 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7569 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7570 @item --no-tls-optimize
7571 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7572 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7573 disable the optimization.
7574
7575 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7576 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7577 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7578 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7579 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7580 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7581 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7582 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7583 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7584 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7585 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7586 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7587 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7588 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7589 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7590
7591 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7592 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7593 @item --no-opd-optimize
7594 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7595 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7596 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7597 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7598
7599 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7600 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7601 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7602 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7603 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7604 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7605 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7606
7607 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7608 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7609 @item --no-toc-optimize
7610 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7611 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7612 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7613 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7614 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7615 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7616 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7617 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7618 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7619 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7620 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7621 optimization.
7622
7623 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7624 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7625 @item --no-multi-toc
7626 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7627 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7628 where TOC
7629 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7630 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7631 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7632 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7633 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7634 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7635 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7636 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7637
7638 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7639 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7640 @item --no-toc-sort
7641 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7642 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7643 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7644 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7645 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7646 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7647 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7648 off this feature.
7649
7650 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7651 @kindex --plt-align
7652 @kindex --no-plt-align
7653 @item --plt-align
7654 @itemx --no-plt-align
7655 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7656 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7657 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7658 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7659 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7660 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7661 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7662
7663 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7664 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7665 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7666 @item --plt-static-chain
7667 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7668 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7669 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7670 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7671
7672 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7673 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7674 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7675 @item --plt-thread-safe
7676 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7677 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7678 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7679 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7680 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7681 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7682 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7683 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7684 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7685 default behaviour.
7686
7687 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7688 @kindex --plt-localentry
7689 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7690 @item --plt-localentry
7691 @itemx --no-localentry
7692 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7693 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7694 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7695 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7696 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7697 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7698 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7699 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7700 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7701 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7702 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7703 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7704 @end table
7705
7706 @ifclear GENERIC
7707 @lowersections
7708 @end ifclear
7709 @end ifset
7710
7711 @ifset S/390
7712 @ifclear GENERIC
7713 @raisesections
7714 @end ifclear
7715
7716 @node S/390 ELF
7717 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7718
7719 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7720 @table @option
7721
7722 @cindex S/390
7723 @kindex --s390-pgste
7724 @item --s390-pgste
7725 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7726 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7727 binaries marked that way.
7728 @end table
7729
7730 @ifclear GENERIC
7731 @lowersections
7732 @end ifclear
7733 @end ifset
7734
7735 @ifset SPU
7736 @ifclear GENERIC
7737 @raisesections
7738 @end ifclear
7739
7740 @node SPU ELF
7741 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7742
7743 @cindex SPU ELF options
7744 @table @option
7745
7746 @cindex SPU plugins
7747 @kindex --plugin
7748 @item --plugin
7749 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7750
7751 @cindex SPU overlays
7752 @kindex --no-overlays
7753 @item --no-overlays
7754 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7755 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7756 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7757 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7758
7759 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7760 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7761 @item --emit-stub-syms
7762 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7763 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7764
7765 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7766 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7767 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7768 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7769 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7770 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7771
7772 @cindex SPU local store size
7773 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7774 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7775 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7776 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7777 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7778
7779 @cindex SPU
7780 @kindex --stack-analysis
7781 @item --stack-analysis
7782 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7783 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7784 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7785 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7786 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7787 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7788 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7789 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7790 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7791 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7792 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7793 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7794 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7795 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7796 and calls will be given.
7797
7798 @cindex SPU
7799 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7800 @item --emit-stack-syms
7801 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7802 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7803 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7804 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7805 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7806 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7807 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7808 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7809 @end table
7810
7811 @ifclear GENERIC
7812 @lowersections
7813 @end ifclear
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset TICOFF
7817 @ifclear GENERIC
7818 @raisesections
7819 @end ifclear
7820
7821 @node TI COFF
7822 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7823 @cindex TI COFF versions
7824 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7825 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7826 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7827 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7828 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7829 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7830
7831 @ifclear GENERIC
7832 @lowersections
7833 @end ifclear
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset WIN32
7837 @ifclear GENERIC
7838 @raisesections
7839 @end ifclear
7840
7841 @node WIN32
7842 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7843
7844 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7845 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7846 command-line options mentioned here.
7847
7848 @table @emph
7849 @cindex import libraries
7850 @item import libraries
7851 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7852 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7853 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7854 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7855 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7856 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7857
7858 @item exporting DLL symbols
7859 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7860 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7861
7862 @table @emph
7863 @item using auto-export functionality
7864 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7865 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7866 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7867
7868 @itemize
7869 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7870 @item --exclude-symbols
7871 @item --exclude-libs
7872 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7873 @item --version-script
7874 @end itemize
7875
7876 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7877 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7878 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7879 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7880 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7881 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7882 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7883 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7884
7885 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7886 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7887 if either of the following are true:
7888
7889 @itemize
7890 @item A DEF file is used.
7891 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7892 @end itemize
7893
7894 @item using a DEF file
7895 @cindex using a DEF file
7896 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7897 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7898 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7899 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7900 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7901
7902 @example
7903 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7904 @end example
7905
7906 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7907 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7908
7909 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7910
7911 @example
7912 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7913
7914 EXPORTS
7915 foo
7916 bar
7917 _bar = bar
7918 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7919 var1 DATA
7920 doo = foo == foo2
7921 eoo DATA == var1
7922 @end example
7923
7924 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7925 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7926 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7927 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7928 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7929 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7930 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7931 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7932 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7933
7934 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7935 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7936 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7937
7938 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7939 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7940 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7941 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7942
7943 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7944 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7945 non-default base address for the image.
7946
7947 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7948 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7949 filename specified on the command line.
7950
7951 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7952
7953 @example
7954 EXPORTS
7955 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7956 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7957 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7958 @end example
7959
7960 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7961 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7962 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7963 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7964 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7965 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7966 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7967
7968 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7969
7970 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7971 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7972 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7973 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7974 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7975
7976 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7977 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7978 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7979 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7980
7981 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7982 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7983 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7984 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7985 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7986 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7987 application will behave unexpectedly.
7988
7989 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7990 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7991 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7992 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7993 the DLL without an import library.
7994
7995 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7996 other DEF file statements
7997
7998 @cindex creating a DEF file
7999 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8000 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8001
8002 @item Using decorations
8003 @cindex Using decorations
8004 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8005 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8006 declared as:
8007
8008 @example
8009 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8010 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8011 @end example
8012
8013 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8014 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8015 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8016 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8017
8018 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8019 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8020 instead:
8021
8022 @example
8023 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8024 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8025 @end example
8026
8027 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8028 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8029 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8030 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8031 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8032 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8033 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8034 information.
8035 @end table
8036
8037 @cindex automatic data imports
8038 @item automatic data imports
8039 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8040 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8041 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8042 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8043 code to these platforms, especially for large
8044 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8045 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8046 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8047 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8048 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8049 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8050 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8051 trigger the feature's use.
8052
8053 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8054 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8055
8056 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8057 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8058
8059 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8060 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8061 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8062 below.
8063
8064 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8065 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8066 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8067 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8068 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8069 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8070 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8071 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8072 references.
8073
8074 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8075 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8076 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8077 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8078 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8079 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8080 run without error on an older system.
8081
8082 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8083 enabled as needed.
8084
8085 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8086 @item direct linking to a dll
8087 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8088 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8089 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8090 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8091 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8092 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8093 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8094 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8095 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8096 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8097
8098 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8099 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8100 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8101 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8102 select the dll instead of an import library.
8103
8104
8105 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8106 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8107
8108 @example
8109 libxxx.dll.a
8110 xxx.dll.a
8111 libxxx.a
8112 xxx.lib
8113 libxxx.lib
8114 cygxxx.dll (*)
8115 libxxx.dll
8116 xxx.dll
8117 @end example
8118
8119 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8120
8121 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8122 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8123 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8124 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8125 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8126
8127 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8128 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8129 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8130 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8131 could coexist on the same machine.
8132
8133 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8134 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8135 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8136
8137 @example
8138 bin/
8139 cygxxx.dll
8140 lib/
8141 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8142 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8143 @end example
8144
8145 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8146 done two ways:
8147
8148 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8149 @example
8150 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8151 @end example
8152
8153 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8154 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8155 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8156 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8157
8158 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8159 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8160 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8161 making the app/dll.
8162
8163 @example
8164 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8165 @end example
8166
8167 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8168
8169 @example
8170 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8171 @end example
8172
8173 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8174 perfectly legal
8175
8176 @example
8177 bin/
8178 cygxxx-5.dll
8179 lib/
8180 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8181 @end example
8182
8183 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8184 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8185 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8186
8187 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8188 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8189
8190 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8191 work with auto-imported data.
8192
8193 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8194 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8195 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8196 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8197 possible to do this without an import lib.
8198
8199 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8200 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8201 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8202 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8203
8204 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8205 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8206 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8207 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8208 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8209 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8210 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8211
8212 @item symbol aliasing
8213 @table @emph
8214 @item adding additional names
8215 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8216 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8217 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8218 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8219 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8220
8221 @example
8222 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8223
8224 EXPORTS
8225 foo
8226 _foo = foo
8227 @end example
8228
8229 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8230
8231 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8232 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8233
8234 @example
8235 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8236 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8237 @end example
8238
8239 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8240 symbols.
8241
8242 @item renaming symbols
8243 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8244 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8245 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8246 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8247 created). In the following example:
8248
8249 @example
8250 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8251
8252 EXPORTS
8253 _foo = foo
8254 @end example
8255
8256 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8257 @samp{_foo}.
8258 @end table
8259
8260 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8261 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8262 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8263 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8264 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8265 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8266 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8267 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8268 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8269 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8270 which is probably not what you wanted.
8271
8272 @cindex weak externals
8273 @item weak externals
8274 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8275 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8276 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8277 are three variants of weak externals:
8278 @itemize
8279 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8280 called lazy externals.
8281 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8282 This form is not presently implemented.
8283 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8284 implemented.
8285 @end itemize
8286 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8287 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8288 uses a default value.
8289
8290 @cindex aligned common symbols
8291 @item aligned common symbols
8292 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8293 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8294 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8295 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8296 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8297 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8298 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8299 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8300
8301 @end table
8302
8303 @ifclear GENERIC
8304 @lowersections
8305 @end ifclear
8306 @end ifset
8307
8308 @ifset XTENSA
8309 @ifclear GENERIC
8310 @raisesections
8311 @end ifclear
8312
8313 @node Xtensa
8314 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8315
8316 @cindex Xtensa processors
8317 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8318 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8319 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8320 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8321 example, with the command:
8322
8323 @smallexample
8324 SECTIONS
8325 @{
8326 .text : @{
8327 *(.literal .text)
8328 @}
8329 @}
8330 @end smallexample
8331
8332 @noindent
8333 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8334 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8335 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8336 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8337 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8338 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8339 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8340
8341 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8342 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8343 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8344 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8345 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8346 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8347 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8348 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8349 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8350 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8351 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8352 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8353
8354 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8355 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8356 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8357 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8358 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8359 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8360 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8361 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8362 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8363 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8364 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8365 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8366 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8367 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8368
8369 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8370 control the linker:
8371
8372 @cindex Xtensa options
8373 @table @option
8374 @item --size-opt
8375 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8376 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8377 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8378 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8379 preserve the correctness of the code.
8380 @end table
8381
8382 @ifclear GENERIC
8383 @lowersections
8384 @end ifclear
8385 @end ifset
8386
8387 @ifclear SingleFormat
8388 @node BFD
8389 @chapter BFD
8390
8391 @cindex back end
8392 @cindex object file management
8393 @cindex object formats available
8394 @kindex objdump -i
8395 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8396 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8397 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8398 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8399 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8400 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8401 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8402 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8403 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8404
8405 @cindex BFD requirements
8406 @cindex requirements for BFD
8407 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8408 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8409 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8410 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8411 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8412 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8413 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8414
8415 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8416 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8417 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8418 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8419
8420 @menu
8421 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8422 @end menu
8423
8424 @node BFD outline
8425 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8426 @cindex opening object files
8427 @include bfdsumm.texi
8428 @end ifclear
8429
8430 @node Reporting Bugs
8431 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8432 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8433 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8434
8435 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8436
8437 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8438 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8439 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8440 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8441 @command{ld}.
8442
8443 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8444 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8445
8446 @menu
8447 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8448 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8449 @end menu
8450
8451 @node Bug Criteria
8452 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8453 @cindex bug criteria
8454
8455 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8456
8457 @itemize @bullet
8458 @cindex fatal signal
8459 @cindex linker crash
8460 @cindex crash of linker
8461 @item
8462 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8463 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8464
8465 @cindex error on valid input
8466 @item
8467 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8468
8469 @cindex invalid input
8470 @item
8471 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8472 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8473 object files are correct.
8474
8475 @item
8476 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8477 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8478 @end itemize
8479
8480 @node Bug Reporting
8481 @section How to Report Bugs
8482 @cindex bug reports
8483 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8484
8485 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8486 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8487 recommend you contact that organization first.
8488
8489 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8490 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8491 distribution.
8492
8493 @ifset BUGURL
8494 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8495 @value{BUGURL}.
8496 @end ifset
8497
8498 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8499 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8500 fact or leave it out, state it!
8501
8502 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8503 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8504 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8505 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8506 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8507 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8508 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8509 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8510 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8511 and the most helpful.
8512
8513 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8514 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8515 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8516
8517 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8518 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8519 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8520 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8521
8522 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8523
8524 @itemize @bullet
8525 @item
8526 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8527 the @samp{--version} argument.
8528
8529 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8530 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8531
8532 @item
8533 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8534 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8535
8536 @item
8537 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8538 version number.
8539
8540 @item
8541 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8542 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8543
8544 @item
8545 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8546 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8547 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8548 sufficient.
8549
8550 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8551 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8552
8553 @item
8554 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8555 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8556 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8557 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8558 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8559 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8560 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8561 attachments are best.
8562
8563 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8564 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8565 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8566 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8567 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8568
8569 @item
8570 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8571 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8572
8573 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8574 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8575 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8576 a chance to make a mistake.
8577
8578 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8579 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8580 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8581 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8582 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8583 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8584 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8585 any conclusion from our observations.
8586
8587 @item
8588 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8589 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8590 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8591 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8592 context, not by line number.
8593
8594 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8595 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8596 @end itemize
8597
8598 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8599
8600 @itemize @bullet
8601 @item
8602 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8603
8604 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8605 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8606 changes will not affect it.
8607
8608 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8609 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8610 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8611 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8612
8613 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8614 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8615 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8616 less time, and so on.
8617
8618 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8619 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8620
8621 @item
8622 A patch for the bug.
8623
8624 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8625 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8626 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8627 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8628
8629 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8630 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8631 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8632 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8633 fixed.
8634
8635 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8636 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8637 help us to understand.
8638
8639 @item
8640 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8641
8642 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8643 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8644 @end itemize
8645
8646 @node MRI
8647 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8648 @cindex MRI compatibility
8649 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8650 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8651 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8652 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8653 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8654 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8655 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8656
8657 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8658 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8659 features to make use of them.
8660
8661 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8662 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8663
8664 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8665 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8666 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8667 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8668 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8669
8670 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8671
8672 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8673 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8674 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8675
8676 @table @code
8677 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8678 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8679 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8680 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8681 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8682 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8683 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8684 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8685 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8686 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8687 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8688
8689 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8690 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8691 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8692 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8693
8694 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8695
8696 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8697 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8698 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8699 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8700
8701 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8702 @item BASE @var{expression}
8703 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8704 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8705
8706 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8707 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8708 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8709 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8710
8711 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8712 @item END
8713 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8714
8715 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8716 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8717 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8718 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8719
8720 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8721 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8722 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8723 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8724
8725 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8726 same line, with no change in its effect.
8727
8728 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8729 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8730 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8731 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8732 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8733 command line.
8734
8735 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8736 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8737 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8738 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8739 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8740
8741 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8742 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8743 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8744 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8745 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8746 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8747 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8748 file, in the order specified.
8749
8750 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8751 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8752 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8753 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8754 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8755 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8756
8757 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8758 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8759 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8760 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8761 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8762 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8763 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8764 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8765 @end table
8766
8767 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8768 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8769 @include fdl.texi
8770
8771 @node LD Index
8772 @unnumbered LD Index
8773
8774 @printindex cp
8775
8776 @tex
8777 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8778 % meantime:
8779 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8780 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8781 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8782 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8783 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8784 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8785 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8786 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8787 \page\colophon
8788 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8789 @end tex
8790
8791 @bye
This page took 0.236367 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.